Operating Instructions
PRO-
115 0 HD
PRO-950HD
PLASMA DISPLAY SYSTEM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or
cords associated with accessories sold with the
product will expose you to chemicals listed on
proposition 65 known to the State of California and
other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth
defect or other reproductive harm.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS
COMMISSION DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Wash hands after handling.
D36-P4_A_En
Information to User
Product Name: Plasma Display System
Model Number: PRO-1150HD/PRO-950HD
Product Category: Class B Personal Computers &
Peripherals
Alteration or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s
right to operate the equipment.
[For Canadian model]
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS
SERVICE, INC.
Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST., LONG BEACH, CA
90801-1760, U.S.A.
Phone: 800-421-1625
URL : http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
D8-10-1-2_En
CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the
unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and
televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections.
D8-10-3a_En
IMPORTANT NOTICE – THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCATED IN THE REAR.
PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND
KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY.
D1-4-2-6-1_En
CAUTION: The ꢀ switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main
disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been
installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord
should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation)
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
STANDBY:
When placed into the standby mode, the main power flow is cut and the unit is no longer
fully operational.
STANDBY/ON Indicator: The indicator is lit red when the unit is in the standby mode and lit blue when it is in the
power-on mode. No operation can be performed when the indicator is off. However, the
Plasma Display system will still consume some power as long as the power cord is
inserted into the power outlet.
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+0 ˚C to +40 ˚C (+32 ˚F to +104 ˚F); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading
the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explanatory
Illustrations shown in this manual are for the PRO-1150HD unless otherwise specified.
04 Part Names........................................... 13
Installing the plasma display ....................16
Attaching/detaching the Pioneer stand ...21
Setting up TV channels manually ........ 36
06 Basic Operations.................................. 26
Watching TV channels ...............................27
Selecting the antenna ...........................27
Changing channels ...............................27
Changing the volume and sound .........28
Changing the language ........................28
Setting MTS/SAP mode ........................29
Viewing a channel banner ....................30
Using the POD service ..........................30
(TV Guidelines) ...................................... 39
Canadian rating systems ..................... 39
Setting Canadian English ratings ....... 40
Setting Canadian French ratings ........ 40
Setting new ratings ............................... 40
Deleting new ratings ............................ 41
Temporarily deactivating the Parental
Control ................................................... 41
Setting your favorite channels .................. 42
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Setting up closed captions ....................... 42
Selecting the type of conventional
The search Episode Options menu ..... 49
AV Selection .............................................. 53
Basic picture adjustments ....................... 54
Advanced picture adjustments ................ 55
Using PureCinema ............................... 55
Using Intelligent Mode ......................... 55
Using the Picture Detail ....................... 55
Using Color Temp ................................. 56
Using CTI and Color Space .................. 56
Using Color Management .................... 56
12 Enjoying through External
Equipment........................................... 65
About External Equipment ........................65
Watching a DVD image ............................65
Watching a VCR image .............................65
Using HDMI Input .....................................66
Enjoying a game console or watching
camcorder images .....................................68
Connecting other audio equipment .........68
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Enjoying photo files ...............................79
Using the HDMI Control functions ...........88
Learning function of the remote control
unit ..............................................................92
Presetting manufacturer codes to control
Delete Learning .....................................92
Manufacturing Reset ............................93
Programming codes ............................94
Using the remote control unit to
control other devices .............................99
15 Appendix ........................................... 103
Troubleshooting .......................................103
Specifications ...........................................117
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important User Guidance Information
01
CImhaptpero1 rtant User Guidance Information
In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this Pioneer PRO-
1150HD/PRO-950HD plasma display, please first read this
information carefully.
With the Pioneer PRO-1150HD/PRO-950HD, you can be assured
of a high quality plasma display with long-life and high reliability.
To achieve images of exceptional quality, this Pioneer plasma
display incorporates state-of-the-art design and construction, as
well as very precise and highly advanced technology.
The Pioneer PRO-1150HD/PRO-950HD incorporates the latest in
color filter technology – Direct Color Filter. This improves the
color / picture reproduction of these models as compared to
previous models. It also eliminates the need for a physical glass
panel to be placed in front of the plasma panel, which furthers
Pioneer’s continued goal of reducing environmental waste in
consumer electronics, now during the manufacturing process
and in the future during the recycling process.
Over the course of its lifetime, the luminosity of the Pioneer PRO-
1150HD/PRO-950HD plasma display will diminish very slowly,
such as with all phosphor-based screens (for example, a
traditional tube-type television). To enjoy beautiful and bright
images on your Pioneer plasma display for many years to come,
please carefully read and follow the usage guidelines below.
Installation guidelines
The Pioneer PRO-1150HD/PRO-950HD plasma display
incorporates a very thin design. To ensure safety, please take the
proper measures to mount or install the plasma display, in order
to prevent the unit from tipping over in the event of vibration or
accidental movement.
This product should be installed by using only parts and
accessories designed by Pioneer. Use of accessories other than
the Pioneer stand or installation bracket may result in instability,
and could cause injury. For custom installation, please consult
the dealer where the unit was purchased. To ensure correct
installation, experienced and qualified experts must install the
unit.
Pioneer will not be held responsible for accident or damage
caused by the use of parts and accessories manufactured by
other companies, inadequate installation or stabilization,
erroneous operation, remodeling or natural disasters.
To avoid malfunction and overheating when installing, make sure
that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. To ensure proper
heat emission:
• Distance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc. For
the minimum space required around the unit, see page 16.
• Do not fit the unit inside narrow spaces where ventilation is
poor.
• Do not cover with a cloth, etc.
• Clean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove dust
build-up by using a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction
setting.
Usage guidelines
All phosphor-based screens (including conventional tube-type
televisions) can be affected by displaying static images for a
prolonged period. Plasma displays are no exception to this rule.
After-image and permanent effects on the screen can be avoided
by taking some basic precautions. By following the
recommendations listed below, you can ensure longer and
satisfactory results from your plasma:
• Whenever possible, avoid frequently displaying the same
image or virtually still moving pictures (e.g. closed-captioned
images or video game images which have static portions).
• Avoid viewing the On Screen Display for extended periods,
from a DVD player, VCR, and all other components.
• Do not leave the same picture freeze-framed or paused
continuously over a long period of time, when using the still
picture mode from a TV, VCR, DVD player or any other
component.
• Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket.
• Do not leave the product tilted over.
• Do not invert the product.
Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal
temperature to rise, and could result in possible malfunction.
When the surrounding or internal temperature exceeds a certain
degree, the display will automatically power off in order to cool
the internal electronics and prevent a hazardous occurrence.
Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate
installation site, improper assembly/installation/mounting,
improper operation of or modifications made to this product.
However, Pioneer cannot be held responsible for accidents or
malfunction caused by the above.
• Images which have both very bright areas and very dark areas
side by side should not be displayed for a prolonged period of
time.
Note
• When playing a game, the “GAME” mode setting within “AV
Selection” is strongly recommended. However, please limit its
use to less than two hours at a time.
• After playing a game, or displaying a PC image or any still
image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the “WIDE”
or “FULL” screen setting for over three times longer than the
previous still/moving image.
The following are typical effects and characteristics of a
phosphor-based matrix display and as such, are not covered by
the manufacturer’s limited warranties:
• Permanent residual images upon the phosphors of the panel.
• The existence of a minute number of inactive light cells.
• Panel generated sounds, examples: Fan motor noise, and
electrical circuit humming / glass panel buzzing
• After using the plasma display, always switch the display to
“STANDBY” mode.
• Extensive viewing of content with top, bottom, or side masks
may cause uneven wear. After viewing masked content, it is
recommended to view full screen motion video for an equal or
greater amount of time.
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important User Guidance Information
01
Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the
product.
• This may result in the discoloration or scratch of the cabinet.
Caution
Pioneer bears no responsibility for any damage arising from
incorrect use of the product by you or other people, malfunctions
when in use, other product related problems, and use of the
product except in cases where the company must be liable.
When not using the product for a long period of time
• If you do not use the product for a long period of time, the
functions of the product may be adversely affected. Switch on
and run the product occasionally.
Plasma display protection function
When still images (such as photos and computer images) stay on
the screen for an extended period of time, the screen will be
slightly dimmed. This is because the protection function of the
plasma display automatically adjusts the brightness to protect
the screen when detecting still images; so this does not
designate malfunction. The screen is dimmed when a still image
is detected for about three minutes.
Condensation
• Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the
product when the product is rapidly moved from a cold place
to a warm place or just after a heater is switched on on a winter
morning, for example. When condensation takes place, do not
switch on the product until condensation disappears. Using
the product with condensation may result in malfunction.
Information of pixel defect
Plasma screens display information using pixels. Pioneer plasma
display panels contain a very large number of pixels. (Depending
on the panel size; over 2.3 million pixels in case of a 42 inch
display, over 3.1 million pixels in case of a 50 inch display). All
Pioneer display panels are manufactured using a very high level
of ultra-precision technology and undergo individual quality
control.
In rare cases, some pixels can be permanently switched off, or
on, resulting in either a black or colored pixel permanently fixed
on the screen.
Cleaning the surface of the screen and the glossy
surface of the front cabinet
• When cleaning the surface of the screen or the glossy surface
of the front cabinet, gently wipe it with a dry soft cloth; the
supplied cleaning cloth or other similar cloths (e.g., cotton and
flannel). If you use a dusty or hard cloth or if you rub the screen
hard, the surface of the product will be scratched.
• If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water
droplets on the surface may enter into the product, resulting in
malfunction.
This effect is common to all plasma displays because it is a
consequence of the technology.
Cleaning the cabinet
If the defective pixels are visible at a normal viewing distance of
between 2.5 and 3.5 meters (8.2 and 11.5 feet) while viewing a
normal broadcast (i.e. not a test card, still image or single color
display) please contact Pioneer Customer Support Div. (USA) or
Customer Satisfaction Dept. (CANADA). See back cover.
• When cleaning the cabinet of this product, gently wipe it with
a clean soft cloth (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a dusty or
hard cloth or if you rub the cabinet hard, the surface of the
cabinet will be scratched.
If, however, they can only be seen close up or during single color
displays then this is considered normal for this technology.
• The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do
not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner to clean the
cabinet. Using these chemicals may result in quality
deterioration or coating removal.
• Do not expose the product to volatile gas or fluid such as
pesticide. Do not bring the product in contact with rubber or
vinyl products for a long period of time. The effect of plasticizer
in the plastic may result in quality deterioration or coating
removal.
Infrared rays
The plasma display releases infrared rays because of its
characteristics. Depending on how the plasma display is in use,
the remote controls of nearby equipment may be adversely
affected or wireless headphones using infrared rays are
interfered with by noise. If this is the case, place that equipment
at a location where its remote control sensor is not affected.
• If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water
droplets on the surface may enter into the product, resulting in
malfunction.
Radio interference
While this product meets the required specifications, it emits a
small amount of noise. If you place such equipment as an AM
radio, personal computer, and VCR close to this product, that
equipment may be interfered. If this happens, place that
equipment far enough from this product.
Handles at the rear of the plasma display
• Do not remove the handles from the rear of the plasma display.
• When moving the plasma display, ask another person for help
and use the handles attached to the rear of the plasma display.
Do not move the plasma display by holding only a single
handle. Use the handles as shown on page 16.
Plasma display driving sound
• Do not use the handles to hang the product when installing or
carrying the product, for example. Do not use the handles for
the purpose of preventing the product from tilting over.
The screen of the plasma display is composed of extremely fine
pixels and these pixels emit light according to received video
signals. This principle may cause you to hear a buzz or electrical
hum coming from the plasma display.
8
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important User Guidance Information
01
Fan motor noise
Caution
The rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases when the
ambient temperature of the plasma display becomes high. You
may hear the sound of the fan motor at that time.
Panel sticking and after-image lag
• Displaying the same images such as still images for a long
time may cause after-image lagging. This may occur in the
following two cases.
To use this product for a long period of time
• Energy Save maintains efficiency of the screen for a long
period of time by decreasing picture brightness and lowering
power consumption. Setting Energy Save to “Mode 1” is
recommended for increased efficiency.
1
After-image lagging due to remaining electric load
When image patterns with very high peak luminance are
displayed more than one minute, after-image lagging may occur
due to the remaining electric load. The after-images remaining
on the screen will disappear when moving images are displayed.
The time for the after-images to disappear depends on the
luminance of the still images and the time they had been
displayed.
About the menu window size following video format
switch
The video program that you watch may be high definition (HD) or
standard definition (SD). This plasma display is designed to scale
to each type of definition properly. If the video program’s
definition type changes while a menu window is displayed on the
screen (for example: HD → SD or SD → HD), the menu size may
temporarily shrink or enlarge until the scaling is completed. This
may happen, for example, when you switch between television
and an external digital video recorder
2
After-image (lag image) due to burning
Avoid displaying the same image on the plasma display
continuously over a long period of time. If the same image is
displayed continuously for several hours, or for shorter periods of
time over several days, a permanent after-image may remain on
the screen due to burning of the fluorescent materials. Such
displayed, but they will not disappear completely.
(D-VHS), or when your recorded program switches between
different definition types, while the on-screen menu is being
shown.
Note
• When a program menu, TV Guide screen or frozen image is
displayed for 5 to 10 minutes, the system automatically turns
the image off to prevent damage from screen burning.
• To minimize image retention, the display position is
automatically changed imperceptibly when watching plasma
display.
If this happens, the menu will return to its normal size after two
to three seconds. This action is normal, and does not indicate a
problem with your plasma display.
Some parts of the picture may not be visible (see Orbiter on
page 64).
Image Retention
When a static image is left frozen on a display for several hours,
a faint imprint of the image, known as image retention, can
remain. This image retention may be temporary or permanent.
Although caused by different things, image retention can occur
on all display technologies, including plasma and LCD. On
today’s plasma displays, permanent image retention is less of a
worry. Most image retention can be improved simply by watching
moving video.
Image retention, also known as burn-in, can occur in all
phosphor-based display systems (including CRT television
systems–both direct view and projection–as well as plasma
displays). Displaying the same still images for long periods
should be avoided as permanent image retention or burn-in may
occur. Recommended guidelines are as follows:
Minimizing damage from screen burning
• Set the Side Mask detection function to “On”. The High
Definition 16:9 aspect ratio images containing side masks will
be detected automatically and side masks will be added or the
image displayed in full screen.
• We recommend that you enjoy watching images displayed in full
screen, except when doing so may result in copyright
infringement. The use of images displayed in screen sizes
different from the original video for financial gain or in
broadcasting for public viewing may result in infringement of the
legally enforceable rights of the copyright holder (see page 62).
Do not display static images for long periods (such as still
images, fixed images from PC or TV game equipment, and/or
fixed images such as time of day indicator or channel logo
display).
Do not display content in the 4:3 aspect ratio (black or gray bars
on left and right side of content) or letter-box content (black bars
above and below content) for extended periods of time, or use
either of these viewing modes repeatedly within a short period of
time. This plasma display is equipped with multiple wide-screen
viewing modes; use one of these screen modes to fill the entire
screen with content.
Caution
DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNSTABLE CART,
STAND, TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE. THE PRODUCT MAY
FALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS
DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT. USE ONLY WITH A CART, STAND,
TRIPOD, BRACKET, OR TABLE RECOMMENDED BY THE
MANUFACTURER, OR SOLD WITH THE PRODUCT. FOLLOW
THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN INSTALLING
THE PRODUCT AND USE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.
A PRODUCT AND CART COMBINATION SHOULD BE MOVED
WITH THE CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND
UNEVEN SURFACES MAY CAUSE THE PRODUCT AND CART
COMBINATION TO OVERTURN.
Displaying dark images after displaying still images for a period
of time may cause image retention. In most cases, the image
retention can be corrected by displaying bright images for a
similar period of time.
If you display still images on your plasma display for long periods
of time, image retention may be irreparable.
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
02
CShaapfteer 2ty Precautions
Electricity is used to perform many useful functions, but it can
also cause personal injuries and property damage if improperly
handled. This product has been engineered and manufactured
with the highest priority on safety. However, improper use can
result in electric shock and/or fire. In order to prevent potential
danger, please observe the following instructions when
12. Power cord protection—The power cords must be routed
properly to prevent people from stepping on them or objects
from resting on them. Check the cords at the plugs and
product.
13. The plasma display used in this product is made of glass.
Therefore, it can break when the product is dropped or
applied with impact. Be careful not to be injured by broken
glass pieces in case the plasma display breaks.
14. Overloading—Do not overload AC outlets or extension cords.
Overloading can cause fire or electric shock.
15. Entering of objects and liquids—Never insert an object into
the product through vents or openings. High voltage flows in
the product, and inserting an object can cause electric shock
and/or short internal parts. For the same reason, do not spill
water or liquid on the product.
installing, operating and cleaning the product. To ensure your
safety and prolong the service life of your product, please read
the following precautions carefully before using the product.
1. Read instructions—All operating instructions must be read
and understood before the product is operated.
2. Keep this manual in a safe place—These safety and operating
instructions must be kept in a safe place for future reference.
3. Observe warnings—All warnings on the product and in the
instructions must be observed closely.
4. Follow instructions—All operating instructions must be
followed.
5. Cleaning—Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before
cleaning the product. To clean the product, use the supplied
cleaning cloth or other soft cloth (e.g., cotton, flannel). Do not
use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6. Attachments—Do not use attachments not recommended by
the manufacturer. Use of inadequate attachments can result
in accidents.
7. Water and moisture—Do not use the product near water,
such as bathtub, washbasin, kitchen sink and laundry tub,
swimming pool and in a wet basement.
16. Servicing—Do not attempt to service the product yourself.
Removing covers can expose you to high voltage and other
dangerous conditions. Request a qualified service person to
perform servicing.
17. Repair—If any of the following conditions occurs, unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet, and request a qualified service
person to perform repairs.
a. When the power cord or plug is damaged.
b. When a liquid was spilled on the product or when objects
have fallen into the product.
c. When the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d. When the product has been dropped or damaged.
e. When the product displays an abnormal condition. Any
noticeable abnormality in the product indicates that the
product needs servicing.
8. Stand—Do not place the product on an unstable cart, stand,
tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can
cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal
injuries as well as damage to the product. Use only a cart,
stand, tripod, bracket or table recommended by the
manufacturer or sold with the product. When mounting the
product on a wall, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use only the mounting hardware recommended
by the manufacturer.
18. Replacement parts—In case the product needs replacement
parts, make sure that the service person uses replacement
parts specified by the manufacturer, or those with the same
characteristics and performance as the original parts. Use of
unauthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock and/or
other danger.
9. When relocating the product placed on a cart, it must be
moved with utmost care. Sudden stops, excessive force and
uneven floor surface can cause the product to fall from the
cart.
19. Safety checks—Upon completion of service or repair work,
request the service technician to perform safety checks to
ensure that the product is in proper operating condition.
20. Wall or ceiling mounting—When mounting the product on a
wall or ceiling, be sure to install the product according to the
method recommended by the manufacturer.
21. Heat sources—Keep the product away from heat sources
such as radiators, heaters, stoves and other heat- generating
products (including amplifiers).
22. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before installing
the speakers (for PRO-1150HD only).
23. Never expose the screen of the plasma display to a strong
impact, for example, by hitting it. The screen may be broken,
resulting in fire or personal injury.
10. Ventilation—The vents and other openings in the cabinet are
designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents
and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause
overheating and/or shorten the life of the product. Do not
place the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface,
since they can block ventilation openings. This product is not
designed for built-in installation; do not place the product in
an enclosed place such as a bookcase or rack, unless proper
ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions are
followed.
11. Power source—This product must operate on a power source
specified on the specification label. If you are not sure of the
type of power supply used in your home, consult your dealer
or local power company.
24. Do not expose the plasma display to direct sunlight for a long
period of time. The optical characteristics of the front
protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or warp.
25. The plasma display weighs about 40.8 kg (89.9 lbs.) for the
PRO-1150HD (including the stand and speaker) and about
31.8 kg (70.1 lbs.) for the PRO-950HD (including the stand).
Because it has small depth and is unstable, unpack, carry,
and install the product with one more person at least and use
the handles.
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
02
Installation Precautions
Observe the following precautions when installing with any items such as the optional bracket.
When using the optional brackets or equivalent items
• Ask your dealer to perform the installation.
• Be sure to use the supplied bolts.
• For details, see the instruction manual that comes with the optional bracket (or equivalent items).
When using other items
• Consult your dealer.
• The following six mounting holes can be used for the installation:
Side view
Rear view (PRO-1150HD)
Mounting surface
Mounting
bracket (or
equivalent item)
Plasma
display
Mounting hole
Mounting hole
Median line
M8 screw
12 mm to 18 mm
(0.5 inches to 0.7 inches)
4
5
Median line
Rear view (PRO-950HD)
Mounting
hole
Mounting hole
Median line
4
5
Median line
Caution
• Be sure to use four or more mounting holes symmetrical to the vertical and horizontal median lines.
• Use M8 screws, which go 12 mm to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches) in depth from the mounting surface of the plasma display. See
the side view above.
• Be careful not to block the ventilation opening at the rear of the plasma display.
• Be sure to install the plasma display on a flat surface because it contains glass.
• The screw holes other than the above are to be used only for the specified products. Never use them for mounting non-specified
products.
Note
• It is strongly recommended to use the optional Pioneer mounting products.
• Pioneer shall not be liable for any personal injury or product damage that results from the use of mounting items other than the
optional Pioneer products.
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplied Accessories
03
CShuappterp3 lied Accessories
Screws (M4 x 10 mm) x 2
(for plastic bands)
Plastic bands x 2
Remote control unit
AA size batteries × 2
(Alkaline batteries for
remote control unit)
Power cord (2 m/6.6 feet)
Speaker accessories
Speed clamps
×
3
(for PRO-1150HD only)
Bead bands
×
3
Speaker cables × 2
Cleaning cloth
Speaker Mounting Fittings
Bracket for TOP-LEFT
Warranty card
Bracket for BOTTOM-LEFT
Bracket for TOP-RIGHT
Operating instructions
Bracket for BOTTOM-RIGHT
Speaker mounting screws
(M5 10 mm: Black) × 16
×
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part Names
04
CPhaaprtetr 4Names
Plasma display
(Front)
Side
PRO-1150HD
PRO-950HD
Side
12
13
7
8
9
14
10
11
15
16
2
3
4
2
1
5
6
1
4
5 6
Viewed from below of the display
Viewed from the front side of the display
The terminals on side panels are common to the PRO-1150HD
and PRO-950HD.
1 a button
(See page 26.)
11 TV GUIDE button*
12 USB port
2
POWER ON indicator
(See page 26.)
STANDBY indicator
(See page 26.)
SLEEP indicator
Room Light Sensor
13 PHONES output terminal
14 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, PB
,
3
P
R)
15 INPUT 3 terminal (VIDEO)
16 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO)
4
5
6
The buttons with asterisks (*) can operate the TV Guide On
Screen™ system.
Remote control sensor
7 STANDBY/ON button
8 INPUT button (ENTER button*)
9 VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons (UP/DOWN
buttons*)
10 CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons (LEFT/RIGHT
buttons*)
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part Names
04
(Rear)
PRO-1150HD
PRO-950HD
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
27
28
19
20
21
19
20
1
2
3
4
4
5
4
5
13
14
13
14
22
21
15
16
17
18
15
16
22
23
24
23
24
5
7
9
10 11
12
6
8
17
18
25
*For exact terminal positions, refer to
the terminal position sheet located
near the terminal compartment.
26 25
The terminals from 1 to 12 are the same as the
PRO-1150HD.
1
Ethernet cable port
CableCARD™ slot
ANT/CABLE A IN terminal
AC IN terminal
INPUT 4 terminal (HDMI)
INPUT 5 terminal (HDMI)
INPUT 6 terminal (HDMI)
INPUT 7 terminal (HDMI)
PC INPUT terminal (ANALOG RGB)
17 INPUT 1 terminals (AUDIO)
18 INPUT 2 terminals (AUDIO)
19 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO)
20 INPUT 5 terminals (AUDIO)
21 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO)
22 IR REPEATER OUT terminal
23 DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL)
24 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO)
25 INPUT 2 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y, PB
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
,
P
R)
10 CONTROL OUT terminal (supports SR+
11 RS-232C terminal (used for factory setup)
12 ANT B IN terminal
13 INPUT 1 terminal (S-VIDEO)
14 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO)
15 SUB WOOFER terminal
)
26 SPEAKERS (R/L) terminals
27 SPEAKERS (R) terminal (Speaker side)
28 SPEAKERS (L) terminal (Speaker side)
16 AUDIO OUT terminals (AUDIO)
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Part Names
04
1
TV a: Turns on the power to the plasma display or places it
Remote control unit
into standby mode.
2
3
Transmission confirmation LED
This section describes the functions of the buttons available
when the mode switch has been set to TV. For the buttons for
controlling other equipment, see Using the remote control unit to
control other devices starting from page 99.
INPUT: Selects an input source of the plasma display.
(“INPUT 1”, “INPUT 2”, “INPUT 3”, “INPUT 4”, “INPUT 5”,
“INPUT 6” and “INPUT 7”)
4
5
SCREEN SIZE: Selects the screen size.
AV SELECTION: Selects audio and video settings. (AV source:
OPTIMUM, STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, PURE, GAME,
USER. PC source: STANDARD, USER.)
1
2
18
6
7
INFO: Displays a channel banner when a TV program is being
watched.
When the TV Guide On Screen™ system is in operation, displays
information about the currently highlighted channel (if available).
HOME MENU: Displays the HOME MENU screen.
MENU: Displays a panel menu when the TV Guide On Screen™
system is in operation.
19
3
4
20
21
22
5
6
7
8
9
DAY +/–: Jumps to the next or previous day of program listings
in the TV Guide On Screen™ Listing service.
23
/
/
/
: Selects a desired item on the menu screen.
24
10 HDMI CONTROL: Displays the HDMI Control menu.
11 FAVORITE CH (A, B, C, D)
8
:
Selects any of the four preset channels. See page 42 for details
to set the FAVORITE CH.
9
25
26
10
While watching, you can toggle the set channels by pressing
and
A,
B
,
C
D.
11
12
12 0 to 9: Selects the channel.
13 •(dot): Enters a dot.
14 CH +/–: Selects the channel.
15 SPLIT: Switches the screen mode among 2-screen, picture-in-
picture, and single-screen.
16 FREEZE: Freezes a frame from a moving image. Press again to
cancel the function.
17 MTS: Selects MTS/SAP or language depending on the program
being watched.
13
14
27
28
18 D: Lights up all buttons
Lights turn off if no operations are performed within five
seconds. This is used for remote control use in dark locations.
19 ANT: Selects the antenna (A, B). See page 23 for details.
20 PC: Selects the PC terminal as an input source.
21 DISPLAY: Displays the channel information.
22 TV GUIDE: Displays the TV Guide On Screen™ system.
23 ENTER: Executes a command.
29
30
24 PAGE +/– (for the TV Guide On Screen™ system): Scrolls the
program listing screen vertically.
25 RETURN: Returns to the previous menu screen.
26 HOME MEDIA GALLERY: Displays the Home Media Gallery
screen.
27 CH ENTER: Executes a channel number.
28 CH RETURN: Returns to the previous channel. This button is
29 VOL +/–: Sets the volume.
30 M MUTING: Mutes the sound.
31 SHIFT: Moves the location of the small screen when in the
picture-in-picture mode.
31
32
15
16
17
Mode switch
(with “TV” selected)
32 SWAP: Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen
or picture-in-picture mode.
Note
• When using the remote control unit, point it at the plasma
display.
• See pages 92 to 102 for operating buttons not listed on this
page.
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
CPhrapetepr 5aration
(PRO-950HD)
Installing the plasma display
Over 50 cm
(19 11/16 inches)
Over 10
cm
(315/16
inches)
Caution
When installing on a rack, etc., hold the plasma display.
Installing the Pioneer speaker
(PRO-1150HD)
Location
• Avoid direct sunlight. Maintain adequate ventilation.
Caution
Note
• Do not move the display holding on to the mounting fittings.
This can result in injury or damage to the unit.
About the speaker
• Allow enough space around the upper and back parts when
installing to ensure adequate ventilation of the rear of the unit.
• In order to prevent damage to the speaker system resulting
from input overload, please observe the following precautions:
• Do not use the speaker with anything other than the plasma
display. Doing so may result in damage or fire.
• Be sure to turn the connected devices off and remove the
power cord from the power outlet beforehand when changing
the connection or installation method.
Moving the plasma display
Because the plasma display is heavy, be sure to have someone
help you when moving it.
(PRO-1150HD)
• When using a tone control function to greatly emphasize treble
sounds, do not use excessive amplifier volume.
• Please handle the speaker with sufficient care, as the grille net
and the cabinet can become damaged or broken when they are
subjected to strong external impacts.
• Placing a CRT computer screen or CRT monitor near to the
speaker may result in interference or color distortion. If this
happens, distance the monitor from the speaker.
Installation
• When installing the speaker, do not use any screws other than
those supplied, otherwise the speaker may come off from the
main unit and fall over.
• When installing the speaker, tighten the screws firmly.
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
PRO-1150HD with the speaker installed
(with the Pioneer table top stand)
Speaker mounting fitting
(for TOP-LEFT)
Speaker mounting fitting
(for TOP-RIGHT)
Speaker mounting
screw (M5 x 10 mm)
Speaker mounting
screw (M5 x 10 mm)
Speaker mounting screw
(M5 x 10 mm)
Speaker mounting screw
(M5 x 10 mm)
Speaker
Speaker
Bead band
(Accessories of the
plasma display)
Speaker mounting
screw (M5 x 10 mm)
Speaker mounting
screw (M5 x 10 mm)
Speaker mounting fitting
(for BOTTOM-RIGHT)
Speaker mounting fitting
(for BOTTOM-LEFT)
Speaker mounting screw
(M5 x 10 mm)
Speaker mounting screw
(M5 x 10 mm)
Speed clamp
Speed clamp
Speed clamp
Speaker cable
Speaker mounting fitting (For TOP-RIGHT)
(The skinny slot is used for mounting to the top.)
Note
• Before installing the speaker, make sure that the Pioneer
table top stand is attached to the plasma display.
• When using the hang on wall unit, first lay the plasma
display on top of a soft sheet, etc., remove the stand, then
attach the speaker.
Speaker mounting fitting
(For BOTTOM-RIGHT)
1. Attach the speaker mounting fittings to the
speakers.
• There is a left speaker and a right speaker. When you are
mounting them, check the label on the back to get them
right.
Screw holes
• There are top and bottom speaker mounting fittings for
both the left and the right speaker. Attach the appropriate
fittings to the top and the bottom on the back of the
speakers using the supplied screws.
(It shows the attachment of the fitting on the right side. It
is attached on the left side by the same procedure.)
Screw holes
Speaker mounting fitting
(For TOP-RIGHT)
Speaker mounting fitting
(For BOTTOM-RIGHT)
Place the speaker so its terminals
(bottom) are facing you.
17
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
2. Screw a supplied screw into the speaker
mounting hole (lower of the two) at the top,
rear of the display.
4. Adjust the position of the speaker and then
tighten the upper and lower screws firmly.
• Do not tighten it all the way yet. Leave it loose, with about
5 mm left to tighten.
5. Tighten the two screws, at the top and
bottom for each speaker (total of four
screws), thus fixing the speakers to the
display.
Speaker
Top, back of
mounting
display
hole
Top of display
5 mm
Leave a space of about 5 mm
3. Hang the speaker mounting fitting on the
screw you installed at the top by passing the
wide part over it and lowering into the slot;
screw in the lower screw temporarily.
After passing the wide part of the hole of the speaker
mounting fitting (top) over the screw, lower the speaker onto
it.
6. Pass the supplied speaker cable between the
speaker and the plasma display (below the
speaker mounting fitting) from below.
7. Connect the speaker cables to the speaker
(see next page).
After passing the
wide part of hole
overthescrew, lower
the speaker.
8. Insert the cable in the groove on the speaker.
Speaker cable
Speaker terminal
Insertion in
groove
Tighten with the
provided screw the
bottom speaker
mounting fitting to the
display temporarily
(one place bottom).
9. Connect the other end of the speaker cables
to the rear of plasma display (see next page).
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
speaker cables
Connecting the speaker cables
to the rear of plasma display.
Connecting the speaker cables
to the speaker.
Black
Gray
Gray
Blackꢂ
Redꢁ
Gray
Black
Red
Black
Red
Connect the cables correctly with respect to
the polarity of the plasma display speaker
Connect the cables correctly with respect to
the polarity of the speaker terminals, that is,
ꢁ cable (Gray) to ꢁ terminals (Red) and ꢂ
cable (Black) to ꢂ terminals (Black).
terminals, that is, ꢁ cable (Gray) to
ꢁ
terminals (Red) and ꢂ cable (Black) to ꢂ
terminals (Black).
Speaker terminal
Speaker terminal
Speaker cable
Speaker terminal
Note
• Press the lever and insert the end of the cable.
• When you release the lever, it
clamps onto the speaker cable.·
• Check if the end of the speaker cables are securely connected
to the terminals by slightly tugging on the cable after making
connections. Loose connections may result in sound dropouts
or noise.
• If there is a short in the and cables caused by an exposed
lead wire, excessive load may be applied to the plasma display,
resulting in interrupted operation or malfunction.
• Incorrect connections of the speaker cable to the right or left of
the plasma display terminals with respect to the polarity may
result in insufficient stereo sound effects, delivering poor bass
sounds or unstable sound image.
Caution
Lever
• Be sure to turn the connected
devices off and remove the power
cord from the wall outlet beforehand when changing the
connection or installation method.
• If you insert the speaker cable too far so that
the insulation is touching the speaker
terminal, you may not get any sound.
• Bundle the cable without pulling.
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
Preventing the plasma display from
falling over
Note
• Use hooks, cords and fittings that are available on the market.
Recommended hook: Nominal diameter 8 mm, length 12 mm
to 18 mm (0.5 inches to 0.7 inches)
After installing the stand, be sure to take special care to ensure
that the plasma display will not fall over and is stabilized to both
the wall and rack.
Stabilizing on a table or rack
Stabilize the plasma display as shown in the diagram using the
supplied plastic bands and screws.
12 mm to 18 mm
(0.5 inches to 0.7 inches)
Note
1. Hook
2. Cord
• To stabilize the plasma display on a table or rack, also use
commercially available wood screws that have a nominal
diameter of 4 mm (5/32 inch) and that are at least 20 mm
(13/16 inch) long.
Fitting
4
5
20 mm min.
(13/16 inch)
4
5
Caution
• A table or rack with adequate strength should always be used
to support the plasma display. Failure to do so could result in
personal injury and physical damage.
• When installing the plasma display, please take the necessary
safety measures to prevent it from falling or overturning in case
of emergencies, such as earthquakes, or of accidents.
• If you do not take these precautions, the plasma display could
fall down and cause injury.
Supplied screw
(M4 x 10 mm)
Wood screw
(commercially available,
4 mm x 20 mm min.)
(5/32 inch x 13/16 inch)
• The screws, hooks, cords and other fittings that you use to
secure the plasma display to prevent it from overturning will
vary according to the composition and thickness of the surface
to which it will be attached.
• Select the appropriate screws, hooks, cords, and other fittings
after first inspecting the surface carefully to determine its
thickness and composition and after consulting a professional
installer if necessary.
Supplied screw
Wood screw
Drill a hole in the middle at the rear of the tabletop panel before
using a wood screw. Perform this work the same way on the left
and right sides.
Using a wall for stabilization
1
Attach falling prevention bolts (hooks) to the plasma
display.
2
Use strong cords to stabilize it appropriately and
firmly to a wall, pillar, or other sturdy element.
Perform this work in the same way on the left and right sides.
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
Attaching/detaching the Pioneer stand
Note
• Make sure to keep the installation bolts (1) and (2) that have
been removed as they are re-used when attaching the stand to
the plasma display.
• Place a sheet or protective cover to protect the display from
scratches or damage.
The plasma display comes with the Pioneer table top stand
attached. You can also install the display on a rack by detaching
the stand. The method for attaching/detaching the stand varies
depending on the product.
• Work only with the plasma display lying flat on a table or similar
surface.
Caution
• When lying the plasma display down, be careful not to scratch
or damage it.
• If the speaker has been installed, it is recommended to detach
the speaker before removing the stand (for PRO-1150HD only).
• This product can be used only with the attached stand. Using
other stands can result in instability, possibly causing injury.
• The weight of a 50 inch plasma display is about 34.8 kg (76.7
lbs.) and a 42 inch about 29.9 kg (65.9 lbs.), it has no depth, and
is unstable. Therefore, at least two people must assemble and
install it.
Attaching the stand again
• Steps for attaching the stand are the same for PRO-
1150HD and PRO-950HD (use the screw holes with “T”
inscribed). Illustrations shown are for PRO-1150HD.
Detaching the stand
• Steps for detaching the stand are the same for PRO-
1150HD and PRO-950HD. Illustrations shown are for PRO-
1150HD.
1
With the plasma display lying flat, fit the stand’s
support columns to the bottom of the plasma display as
indicated by the arrows, then slowly insert them.
1
With the plasma display lying flat, loosen and remove
the two installation bolts (1) and (2) using a
screwdriver.
• Be extremely careful not to insert the support columns of
the stand into any part of the plasma display other than the
stand insertion slots. Doing so might damage the plasma
display panel or its ports or result in warping of the stand.
Installation bolts (1): M8 x 23 mm (black) for PRO-950HD
M8 x 23 mm (black) for PRO-1150HD
Line up the column supports
with the bottom of the
plasma display, as indicated
in the accompanying
diagram.
Installation bolts (2): M8 x 60 mm (black) for PRO-950HD
M8 x 40 mm (black) for PRO-1150HD
Installation bolts (1) (Step 1)
Installation bolts (2) (Step 2)
Plasma
display
Insert the stand into the
plasma display so that an
arrow with “FRONT/FACE
AVANT” mark inscribed at
the bottom of the stand
indicates downward.
Sheet
Table top stand
Sheet
2
Remove the stand from the plasma display.
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
2
Attach the stand at the points indicated by the arrows
and tighten the installation bolts (2) and (1) firmly using
a screwdriver.
Installation bolts (1): M8 x 23 mm (black) for PRO-950HD
M8 x 23 mm (black) for PRO-1150HD
Installation bolts (2): M8 x 60 mm (black) for PRO-950HD
M8 x 40 mm (black) for PRO-1150HD
Screw hole with “T” inscribed
Installation bolts (1) (Step 2)
Installation bolts (2) (Step 1)
3
Replace the plasma display to stand upright.
For speaker installation, see Installing the Pioneer
speaker on pages 16 (PRO-1150HD only).
Note
• Be sure to install the plasma display in a flat, stable location.
• Insert the screws into the holes vertically and tighten them.
• Place a sheet or protective cover to protect the display from
scratches or damage.
• Work only with the plasma display lying flat on a table or similar
surface.
• When lying the plasma display down, be careful not to scratch
or damage it.
• If the speaker has been installed, it is recommended to detach
the speaker before attaching the stand (for PRO-1150HD only).
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
Cable connections for watching digital
and/or conventional TV channels
Inserting the CableCARD™
The plasma display is equipped with a slot for inserting a
CableCARD™. When you are watching digital and/or High
Definition TV channels over cable, the card allows you to use the
POD service provided by the cable TV company; the POD stands
for Point of Deployment. This service presents various types of
useful information, using HTML text.
This system is equipped with two terminals for inputting TV
broadcasting signals: ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN. The ANT/
CABLE A IN terminal accepts both digital and conventional TV
broadcasting signals while the ANT B IN terminal accepts only
conventional TV broadcasting signals. When using cable TV to
watch digital and/or conventional TV channels, connect to the
ANT/CABLE A IN terminal as shown. In addition, you may
connect an antenna to the ANT B IN terminal as shown; use an
outdoor antenna to enjoy clearer pictures. If your outdoor
antenna uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector,
plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the plasma display.
1
Confirm that the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal has been
connected with the coaxial cable from the Cable
Converter.
2
Hold and push the tab of the slot cover on the rear of
the plasma display leftward, and remove the cover
while pulling the tab’s latch downward.
Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable
(Viewed from below of the
plasma display)
Tab
VHF antenna
UHF antenna
U/Vmixer
1
2
4
5
3
Insert the specified CableCARD™ into the Cable CARD
slot as far as it goes.
Rear view
Coaxial
Coaxial
Cable TV
Note
• Be sure to connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal
reception may fail if not properly connected.
• In order to watch cable TV channels, be sure to connect the
cable to the ANT/CABLE A IN terminal.
Note
• The ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals must not receive
the same signals. For example, do not connect a cable from a
cable TV to both the ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals.
Similarly, do not connect a cable from an antenna to both the
ANT/CABLE A IN and ANT B IN terminals.
• TV Guide may not be available in all areas and is not available
with satellite systems. In addition, as content providers move to
digital programming and broadcasting, TV Guide Data may be
unavailable or become unavailable.
• Be sure to insert only the specified CableCARD™.
• Do not insert a PC card.
• When you use a CableCARD™, you need not execute Auto
Channel Preset; the CableCARD™ automatically generates a
cable channel list.
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
Routing cables
When the speaker is installed under the plasma display panel
(for PRO-1150HD only)
Speaker cable
Bead band
Rear view
Speed clamp
Bead band
Speed clamp
Speed clamp
Attaching speed clamps to the main unit
Attach the speed clamps using the three holes (42 inches: two
holes) marked with below, depending on your routing system.
Attaching and removing speed clamps
Insert [1] into an appropriate hole on the rear of the plasma
display and snap [2] into the back of [1] to lock the clamp. Speed
clamps are designed to be difficult to undo once in place. Please
attach them carefully.
Use pliers to twist the clamp 90º, pulling outward. The clamp may
deteriorate over time and become damaged if removed.
for PRO-1150HD
4
5
5
2
1
for PRO-950HD
Note
4
5
• Use the supplied bead bands and speed clamps as necessary.
• When tidying up your speaker cables, make sure to bundle
them so that they are not subjected to any pressure.
Connecting the power cord
Connect the power cord after all component connections have been completed.
Plasma display (rear view)
AC IN terminal is located
on the upper edge of the
compartment.
4
5
Noise filter
Partially eliminates noise
Power cord
caused by the power source.
Caution
• Use only the supplied power cord.
• Be sure to use the specified power supply voltage;
neglecting this can result in fire or electric shock.
Note
• For the plasma display, a three-core power cord
with a ground terminal is used for efficient
protection. Always connect the power cord to a
three-pronged outlet and make sure that the cord
is properly grounded.
• Always turn off the power of the plasma display when
connecting or disconnecting power cords.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet when the
plasma display is not going to be used for a long period of time.
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
05
Allowed operation range of the remote control
unit
Preparing the remote control unit
Inserting batteries
Operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the
remote control sensor located at the bottom right of the front
panel of the plasma display. The distance from the remote control
sensor must be within 7 m (23 feet) and the angle relative to the
sensor must be within 30 degrees in the right or left direction.
1
Open the battery cover.
2
Load the supplied two AA size batteries while inserting
their respective negative polarity (–) ends first.
7 m
30º
(23 feet)
Remote control
sensor
• The battery polarities must correspond with the (+) and (–)
indicators in the battery compartment.
3
Close the battery cover.
Note
• For the remote control sensor located on the PRO-950HD, see
Part Names on page 13
Cautions regarding the remote control unit
• Do not expose the remote control unit to shock, liquid, or high
humidity.
• Do not place the remote control unit under direct sunlight; the
unit may deform.
• The remote control unit may not work properly if the remote
sensor window of the plasma display is under direct sunlight or
strong lighting. In such case, change the angle of the lighting
or plasma display, or operate the remote control unit closer to
the remote sensor window.
• When any obstacle exists between the remote control unit and
the remote control sensor, the remote control unit may not
function.
• As the batteries become weak, the remote control unit can
function within a shorter distance from the remote control
sensor. Replace the batteries with new ones if necessary.
• The plasma display emits very weak infrared rays from its
screen. If you place such equipment operated through infrared
remote control as a VCR nearby, that equipment may not
receive commands from its remote control unit properly or
entirely. If this is the case, place that equipment at a location
far enough from the plasma display.
• Depending on the installation environment, infrared rays from
the plasma display may not allow this system to properly
receive commands from the remote control unit or may
shorten allowable distances between the remote control unit
and the remote control sensor. The strength of infrared rays
emitted from the screen differs, depending on images
displayed on the screen.
Cautions regarding batteries
• The remote control unit cannot operate the system if the
batteries in the unit are weak. When this happens, replace the
batteries with new ones.
• When you replace the batteries, use alkaline batteries for the
remote control unit.
• Do not mix batteries of different types. Different types of
batteries have different characteristics.
• Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries
can shorten the life of new batteries or cause chemical leakage
in old batteries.
• Do not leave dead batteries in the remote control unit;
chemical leakage will occur. If you find any chemical leakage,
wipe thoroughly with a cloth.
• The batteries supplied with this product may have a shorter life
expectancy due to storage conditions.
• If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended
period of time, remove the batteries from it.
Battery disposal
When disposing of used batteries, please comply with
governmental regulations or environmental public
institution’s rules that apply in your country/area.
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
06
Chapter 6
Basic Operations
Turning on the power
Caution
• While the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are off, the
system cannot be placed into the power-on mode even when
TV a or STANDBY/ON button is pressed. Press a on the
plasma display.
• The plasma display will still consume some power as long as
the power cord is inserted into the power outlet.
•
Press a on the plasma display when the POWER ON and
STANDBY indicators are off.
• The POWER ON indicator on the plasma display lights up
blue.
•
Press TV a on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON
on the plasma display if the STANDBY indicator lights up
red.
Plasma display
(PRO-1150HD)
• The POWER ON indicator on the plasma display lights up
blue.
a
button
POWER ON indicator
Turning off the power
STANDBY indicator
(to standby mode)
1
Press TV a on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON
on the plasma display.
(PRO-950HD)
• The system enters the standby mode and the image on the
screen disappears.
• The STANDBY indicator lights up red.
• This will allow the system to automatically receive digital
TV program information while in the standby mode.
Note
• If you are not going to use this system for a long period of time,
remove the power cord from the power outlet.
POWER ON
indicator
Plasma display status indicators
STANDBY
indicator
The table below shows the operational status of the plasma
display. You can check the current status of the system with the
indicators on the plasma display.
a
button
Indicator Status
POWER ON STANDBY
System Status
Viewed from below of the display (left).
The power cord of the plasma display has
been disconnected. Or, the power cord of
the plasma display has been connected but
the a button of the plasma display is off.
Power to the system is on.
STANDBY/ON
button
The system is in the standby mode.
(Right side view)
For other than the above, see Troubleshooting on page 103.
Note
• You can select “Auto”, “High”, “Mid” or “Low” for the brightness
of the POWER ON indicator. When “Auto” is selected, the
brightness of the indicator changes to “High”, “Mid” or “Low”
to match the brightness level of the viewing area. For details,
see Blue LED Dimmer on page 64.
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
06
Watching TV channels
Plasma display (right side view)
Unless you set up TV channels that you can watch under the
current conditions, you cannot tune in those channels. For the
procedure, see Setting up TV channels on page 36.
Note
alert messages scrolling at the top of the screen. Those
messages are broadcasted by TV stations as necessary when
in emergency situations.
CHANNEL +/–
Selecting the antenna
After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control unit
has been set to “TV”, press ANT on the remote control unit to
select antenna A or B.
• Make this selection depending on the connections to the
antenna input terminals at the rear of the plasma display (page
23).
• While watching a broadcast, press ANT to view the image
received from the other antenna.
• Pressing ANT while watching in the multiscreen mode (TV
image and video image) with TV selected will display the TV
image of the other antenna.
• Pressing ANT while watching in the multiscreen mode with
two TV images displayed will not have any effect.
Changing channels
To increase the channel number, press CH + on the remote
control unit. To decrease the channel number, press CH –.
• CHANNEL +/– on the plasma display operates the same as CH
+/– on the remote control unit.
• Press CH RETURN to switch the currently tuned channel to the
previously tuned channel.
Press CH RETURN again to restore the currently tuned
channel.
Using 0 to 9 and • (dot) on the remote control unit
Select channels directly by pressing buttons 0 to 9. To select
subchannels, also use the • (dot) button.
Channel banner
EXAMPLE
• To select channel 5 (one-digit channel), press 5.
12:33pm
DTV 2 • 1002.102
A
• To select channel 25 (two-digit channel), press 2 then 5.
• To select channel 125 (three-digit channel), press 1, 2, then 5.
• To select subchannel 10.01, press 1, 0, • (dot), 0, then 1.
XXXXXXXXXX
12:30pm — 2:00pm
XXX
• To select subchannel 10.001 (for cable TV), press 1, 0,
• (dot), 0, 0, then 1.
Note
• After entering a channel or subchannel number, you may
press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly.
• Each time you change a channel, a channel banner appears
that shows information about the currently selected channel.
To clear the channel banner, press INFO.
• If you do not setup the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the
channel banner may not display certain types of program
information.
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
06
Changing the volume and sound
Changing the language
• VOLUME +/– on the plasma display operates the same as VOL
If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi-
language services, you can switch among the languages by
pressing MTS on the remote control unit.
+/– on the remote control unit.
Plasma display (right side view)
VOLUME +/–
Each time you press MTS, the language switches.
Note
• Switchable languages differ depending on the current
broadcast.
• If the language selected through language setting is available
when the channel or program is changed, you will hear that
language.
• If you are watching a digital TV program without sound or
language information, “N/A” appears on the screen. With a
language other than English, French, and Spanish are
selected, “Others” will appear.
To increase the volume, press VOL + on the remote control unit.
To decrease the volume, press VOL –.
Volume adjustment display
• To mute the sound output, press MUTING. “
” appears on
the screen. To quit muting, press MUTING again. Pressing
VOL + also quits muting.
Muting display
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
06
When receiving STEREO sound signals
Setting MTS/SAP mode
A
125
When watching conventional TV programs, you may enjoy stereo
sound and/or Secondary Audio Programs (SAP), using the Multi-
channel Television Sound (MTS) function.
STEREO
In STEREO mode
• Stereo broadcasts
A
125
You can enjoy, for example, sports, shows, and concerts in
dynamic stereo sound.
STEREO
In SAP mode
• SAP broadcasts
MAIN sound: The normal program soundtrack (either in mono
or stereo).
A
125
SAP sound: Listen to second language, supplementary
commentary and other information. (SAP is mono sound.)
MONO
In MONO mode
When receiving MONO + SAP sound signals
Note
A
125
• Conventional TV channels in this manual designate TV
channels that are received through the conventional VHF/UHF
frequencies or conventional cable TV channels.
MONO (SAP)
In STEREO mode
• When stereo sound is difficult to hear, you may manually
switch to the MONO mode to obtain clearer sound.
A
125
• Once the MONO mode is selected, the plasma display sound
remains mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast.
You must reselect the STEREO mode if you want to hear stereo
sound again.
SAP (MAIN)
In SAP mode
A
125
• Selecting MTS while the input source is INPUT 1 to INPUT 7 or
PC does not change the type of sound. In this case, sound is
determined by the video source.
MONO (SAP)
In MONO mode
• The MTS button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™
When receiving STEREO + SAP sound signals
system is displayed.
A
125
• In each of the MTS/SAP modes selected, the display changes
depend on broadcast signals being received.
STEREO (SAP)
In STEREO mode
A
125
SAP (STEREO)
In SAP mode
A
125
MONO (SAP)
In MONO mode
Each time you press MTS, MTS toggles as shown below.
STEREO mode
SAP mode
MONO mode
When receiving MONO sound signals
A
125
MONO
In STEREO mode
STEREO
SAP
MONO
A
125
MAIN
In SAP mode
A
125
MONO
In MONO mode
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
06
Viewing a channel banner
Using the multiscreen functions
While watching a TV program, pressing INFO causes the
following banner to appear. Pressing INFO again causes the
banner to disappear.
Splitting the screen
Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture-in-
picture mode.
1
2
3
4
2-screen
12:33pm
DTV 2 • 1002.102
A
XXXXXXXXXX
12:30pm — 2:00pm
XXX
7
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Station name
Current time
Picture-in-picture
Channel number
Input (Ant. A or Ant. B)
Program title
Program time schedule
Channel logo
TV rating name or icon
Note
• The above information is not displayed if not included in
broadcast signals.
• If you do not setup the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the
channel banner may not display certain types of program
information.
Using the POD service
If you have watched digital and/or High Definition TV channels
over cable, you can use the POD service provided by the cable TV
company. This service presents various types of useful
information, using HTML text.
1
Press SPLIT to select the display mode.
• Each time you press SPLIT, the display mode is switched
among 2-screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen.
Press HOME MENU, 9, 9, then 9 to view the POD display.
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
06
• In 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press SWAP to
switch the position of the two screens shown.
Freezing images
Left screen is the active screen which will be indicated by
Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame
from a moving image that you are watching.
“
”. The user is allowed to operate picture and sound.
Moving image
Still image
• In picture-in-picture mode, press SHIFT to move the
position of the small screen in anti-clockwise.
1
2
Press FREEZE.
• A still image appears on the right screen while a moving
image is shown on the left screen.
Press FREEZE again to cancel the function.
Note
2
To select the desired input source, press the appropriate
input source button.
• With the screen split, any image cannot be frozen.
• When you try to use this function when it is not available, a
warning message appears.
• Image FREEZE is canceled automatically if you do not perform
any operation for five minutes.
• Displaying pictures in FREEZE mode for an extended period
may cause an after-image.
• If watching TV programs, press CH +/– to change the
channel.
Note
• The SPLIT button is disabled while the TV Guide On Screen™
system is displayed.
• The multiscreen function cannot display images from the
same input source or two external input sources at the same
time. If you make such an attempt, a warning message
appears.
• When you press HOME MENU, the single-screen mode is
restored and the corresponding menu is displayed.
• When the two screens show the same analog broadcasting
coming through antenna A and B, the picture quality may differ
between the two screens.
• Displaying pictures in multi-screen mode for an extended
period may cause an after-image.
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup
07
Chapter 7
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup
Welcome Screen
Initial TV set up leads you to the Welcome screen.
About the TV Guide On Screen™ system
The TV Guide On Screen™ system is a free, interactive on-screen
television program guide. The system offers program listings,
searching by keyword, reminders and more. The TV Guide On
Screen™ system is a convenient way to find out what’s on right
now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre. It also
allows you to automatically set your viewing and recording
selections quickly and easily.
Or press TV GUIDE to begin setup.
• The Welcome Screen lists features in the Guide.
• Press ENTER to display Screen 1 (shown on the right column
of this page).
Before you can start using the TV Guide On Screen™ system,
you’ll need to set it up.
Legal Notices
In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks
of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada,
TV Guide is a registered mark of Transcontinental, Inc. and is used under
license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
Note
• The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide provides
listings for cable-ready and digital cable services as well as
over-the-air broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite
services.
• Depending on the current settings and selected items, the
order of the setup screens may differ from the one given in this
manual. Follow the instructions shown on the screens.
Reminder Screen
If you previously skipped Guide setup, you see the Reminder
• TV Guide may not be available in all areas. As content providers
move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV Guide data
may be unavailable or become unavailable.
Screen when you power on your TV.
To make a selection, press
/
to highlight an option, and press
ENTER.
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™
system
• “Start setup” displays Screen 1.
• “Remind me to set it up later” returns you to watching TV.
• “Don’t remind me again” returns you to watching TV and stops
the reminder screen from appearing upon power on.
When the plasma display is powered on for the very first time, you
are automatically taken through the setup process. Immediately
thereafter the TV Guide On Screen™ setup process begins,
starting with the Welcome Screen. Setup may be accessed from
the initial Setup reminder screens, or by pressing TV GUIDE for a
device in which TV Guide On Screen™ has not yet been setup.
Note
• Once you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system it may take
up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV program listings. Receipt
of all eight days of listings may take up to one week (see Screen
6).
Note
• If you decide not to set up the Guide now, this reminder screen
will appear each time you power on the TV (except if you
selected “Don’t remind me again”).
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup
07
Screen 3: Select service(s)
• Press
System Setup Screens
Screen 1: Select Country
/
to highlight the connected video source(s) for
which you would like to receive show listings.
• This screen asks you the location of your TV.
• Press ENTER to make your selection(s).
• Press
/
to highlight a country.
• Press
to highlight Next.
• Press ENTER to display Screen 2.
• Press ENTER to go to Screen 4.
Note
• If you do not have cable service, you must select Antenna in
order to receive a channel lineup and listings.
Screen 2: Enter ZIP or Postal Code
• If you selected USA in Screen 1, you see the ZIP Code screen.
• Input ZIP Code by either
• pressing the number keys or
• pressing
/
to scroll through numbers, and then
to
Screen 4: Which input terminal is the system plugged into?
move to the next character field and Next.
• Select “ANT/CABLE A IN” or “ANT B IN” and you see Screen 5.
• You can select the Back button from any screen to return to the
previous setup screens to correct or review the information you
entered.
• Press ENTER to display Screen 3.
• If you selected Canada in Screen 1, you see the Postal Code
screen.
• Input Postal Code by pressing
numbers) and then to move to the next character field.
• Press to highlight Next.
• Press ENTER to display Screen 3.
/
to scroll through letters (or
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup
07
Screen 5: Are the settings correct?
• If you select “Yes”, you see Screen 6.
• If you select “No”, you see Screen 1.
Screen 6: Congratulations
34
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The HOME MENU
08
Chapter 8
The HOME MENU
HOME MENU overview
Picture
Item
Page
53
For AV source
AV Selection
Contrast
54
HOME MENU
Picture
Item
Page
53
Brightness
Red
54
AV Selection
Contrast
Brightness
Color
54
54
Green
54
54
Blue
54
54
Reset
54
Tint
54
Sound
Same as the AV source
Energy Save
Power Management
58
Sharpness
Pro Adjust
Reset
54
59
54
60
54
Option
60
Sound
Treble
58
Auto Setup
61
Bass
58
Manual Setup
HDMI Input
61
Balance
Reset
58
66
58
HDMI Control Setting
90
Sound Effect
Energy Save
No Signal off
No Operation off
59
71 – 87
88
Power Control
59
59
60
Sleep Timer
Option
60
Using the HOME MENU
Position
60
Auto Size
63
menus. For the actual procedures, see the appropriate pages that
describe individual functions.
Side Mask
63
HDMI Input
66
HDMI Control Setting
Blue LED Dimmer
Orbiter
90
64
64
Video Pattern
Digital Audio Out
Language
64
69
64
Tuner NR Setting
Game Control Pref
Room Light Sensor
Channel Setup
Parental Control
Favorites
61
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.
Press to select a menu item, and then press ENTER.
62
/
64
Repeat step 2 until you access the desired submenu
item.
• The number of menu layers differs depending on the menu
items.
• If you select “Tuner Setup”, a menu bar appears at the
bottom of the screen. To select a submenu item on the bar,
Tuner Setup
36
37 – 41
42
Closed Captions
Clock
42 – 43
43
press
Press
press ENTER.
/
instead of
/
.
Home Media Gallery
HDMI Control
71 – 87
88
4
5
/
to select an option (or parameter), and then
• For some menu items, press
/
instead of
/
.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• You can return to the upper menu levels by pressing RETURN.
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuner Setup
09
Chapter 9
Tuner Setup
6
7
Select a channel to be skipped (
/
then ENTER).
Setting up TV channels
Channel Setup Ant. A
Channel Keep/Skip
This section describes how to search and set up TV channels that
you can watch under the current conditions. Unless you set up
TV channels using Auto Channel Preset, you may not be able to
tune in those channels.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Ant. A
Channel Keep/Skip
2.0
4.0
6.0
Home Menu Exit
Using Auto Channel Preset
• For the skipped channel, a check mark disappears.
Auto Channel Preset automatically searches and sets up TV
channels.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.
• To restore skipped channels, use the above procedure except
that you select a skipped channel in step 6.
• When using the Cable Converter, you may need to manually
add Cable Converter output channels.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
/ then ENTER).
Select “Channel Setup” (
Select “Ant. A” or “Ant. B” (
Select “Auto Channel Preset” (
Select “Air” or “Cable” ( then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
Setting up TV channels manually
/
This section describes how to manually set up TV channels that
have not been set up by Auto Channel Preset.
Channel Setup
Ant. A
Ant. A
Auto Ch. Preset Cable
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Air
Cable
Auto Channel Preset
2.0
4.0
6.0
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
/ then ENTER).
D
Enter
Home Menu
Exit
Begin Preset
Cancel
Select “Channel Setup” (
Select “Ant. A” or “Ant. B” (
Select “Add Channel” (
• Channel search automatically starts.
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
Channel Setup
Ant. A
Auto Ch. Preset Cable
Select a channel number to be added (
/
then ENTER).
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
One Moment Please …
Ant. A
Auto Channel Preset • Cable
• You can also use buttons 0 to 9 to enter a channel number.
D
Home Menu
Cancel
Exit
Channel Setup Ant. A
Add Channel
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
• To quit Auto Channel Preset halfway, press D.
Ant. A
Add Channel
000
1
7
After Auto Channel Preset has been finished, press
HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Home Menu Exit
• After ENTER has been pressed, a confirmation screen
appears.
Note
• When using the Cable Converter, you may need to manually
add Cable Converter output channels.
• When an inserted CableCARD™ is functioning, you can
execute Auto Channel Preset by selecting “Ant.B” in step 4.
7
8
Press A to complete the setup process.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• Adding channels manually is for adding analog channels only.
Digital channels cannot be added.
Setting for skipping unwanted channels
From among TV channels searched and set up using Auto
Channel Preset, you can select channels to be skipped when
CH+/- are operated.
Checking signal strength
When you have selected antenna A, you can check the current
channel’s signal strength. You may use this function when
receiving a channel through a VHF/UHF antenna.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
/ then ENTER).
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Channel Setup” (
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
/ then ENTER).
Select “Ant. A” or “Ant. B” (
Select “Channel Keep/Skip” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Channel Setup” (
Select “Ant. A” (
/
/
then ENTER).
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuner Setup
09
• No Parental Control setting is available for any content played
or displayed in the Home Media Gallery.
5
6
Select “Signal Strength” (
/
then ENTER).
Channel Setup
Ant. A
Signal Strength
Voluntary movie rating system (MPAA)
Maximum: 100
Current: 100
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Ant. A
Signal Strength
Rating Description
N/A
G
Not applicable for MPAA ratings
Home Menu
Exit
General audiences. All ages admitted.
• Adjust the direction of the antenna so that the current
signal strength reaches as close to the maximum signal
strength as possible.
PG
Parental guidance suggested. Some material may
not be suitable for children.
PG-13
R
Parents strongly cautioned. Some material may be
inappropriate for children under 13.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Age-Base
Restricted. Under 17 requires accompanying
parent or adult guardian (age varies in some
jurisdictions).
Note
• This function is available only when receiving digital
broadcasting signals over air.
• When you use the TV Guide On Screen™ system with a cable
service, select “Cable” for “Auto Channel Preset”.
NC-17
NR
No one 17 and under admitted
Not rated
• Executing more than one scan for cables will result in
broadcasting reception failures.
Note
• The voluntary movie rating system only uses an age-based
rating.
Checking the CableCARD™ ID
The plasma display has a slot for a CableCARD™ that is used for
managing your information by the cable TV company. You will
locate the CableCARD™ slot on the rear of the plasma display.
The following procedure allows you to check your CableCARD™
ID and the Host ID.
TV ratings
Rating Description
TV-Y
All children
TV-Y7
TV-G
Children seven and above
General audiences
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
/ then ENTER).
Age-Base
Select “Channel Setup” (
Select “POD ID” ( ).
TV-PG
TV-14
Parental guidance suggested
Parents strongly cautioned
/
• The Host ID and CableCARD™ ID appear.
TV-MA Mature audiences only
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
Parental Control
• The system also allows you to select “None”, which blocks
programs with a rating of “None”. For the examples of such
programs, see “Note” on the left column on this page.
With the Parental Control, parents can prevent their children
from watching inappropriate TV programs, VCR or DVD contents.
When an attempt is made to watch a program (or content)
blocked by parents, the plasma display shows nothing but a
message. The Parental Control functions for both conventional
and digital TV channels.
In the U.S. three rating systems have been provided: the TV
ratings, TV Parental Guidelines, and movie ratings. Movie ratings
are provided by the Motion Picture Association of America
(MPAA) and are used for original movies not edited for television.
Changing the password
Using a password prevents other persons from changing
Parental Control settings. A default password (1234) has been set
before shipment. Use the following procedure to change the
password.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
For the rating system in Canada, see page 39.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Change Password” ( then ENTER).
Select “Parental Control” (
Select “Password” (
/
Note
/
• In the U.S. TV Parental Guideline Rating System, programs
with a rating of “None” may be blocked on this product.
Examples of programs with a “None” rating include:
/
• Emergency Bulletins (such as EAS messages, weather
warning and others)
• Locally originated programming
Parental Control
Password
Password
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Change Password
Clear Password
• News
Home Menu
• Political
Exit
• Public Service Announcements
• Religious
6
Enter the current four-digit password, using buttons 0 to 9.
• Sports
• Weather
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuner Setup
09
7
8
Enter a four-digit password to be newly set, using buttons
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
0 to 9
.
Setting the voluntary movie rating system
(MPAA)
Enter the same password that you have entered in step
7.
• A confirmation screen appears.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
9
Press A.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
10 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Select “Parental Control” (
Select “MPAA Ratings” (
/
/
Note
Select the desired rating and change the setting (
then ENTER).
/
• Take note of the newly set password and keep it handy.
Clearing the password
Parental Control
MPAA Ratings
MPAA Ratings
Use the following procedure to clear the password.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Blocked MPAA Ratings
N/A, G, PG,PG-13, R, NC-17
N/A
G
PG
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Home Menu
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Clear Password” ( then ENTER).
Exit
Select “Parental Control” (
Select “Password” (
/
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
password using buttons 0 to 9.
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
• All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.
/
/
Parental Control
Password
Password
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Change Password
Clear Password
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
Home Menu
Exit
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be
automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating
causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.
6
Enter the current four-digit password, using buttons 0
to 9.
• A confirmation screen appears.
Press A.
Setting the TV ratings
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
Note
Select “Parental Control” (
Select “TV Ratings” (
/
then ENTER).
• The above procedure will reset the password to the factory
default (1234).
/
then ENTER).
Select the desired rating and change the setting (
then ENTER).
/
Activating the Parental Control
Parental Control
TV Ratings
TV Ratings
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
TV-None
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
TV-Y
Blocked TV Ratings
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
Select “Parental Control” (
Select “Status” (
Select “On” (
/
Home Menu
Exit
/
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
password using buttons 0 to 9.
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
/
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
password using buttons 0 to 9.
We suggest you write down your password so you don’t forget it.
If you forget the password
When the message “Enter your Password” is displayed in step 6
under “Clearing the password”, press the ENTER button on the
remote control unit and hold it down for three seconds or longer.
The password reverts to “1234”.
PRO-1150HD/PRO-950HD
Your password No.:
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuner Setup
09
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
• All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.
Canadian rating systems
In Canada you can choose the Canadian English ratings or the
Canadian French ratings. These ratings are based on the
Canadian Radio-Television and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) policy.
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
Canadian English ratings
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be
automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating
causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.
Rating Description
E
Exempt: Includes news, sports, documentaries and
other information programming; talk shows, music
videos, and variety programming.
Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV
Guidelines)
C
Children: Intended for younger children under the age
of eight years. Pays careful attention to themes that
could threaten their sense of security and well-being.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “TV Parental Guidelines” ( then ENTER).
C8+
Children over eight years old: Contains no portrayal
of violence as the preferred, acceptable, or only way
to resolve conflict; nor encourages children to imitate
dangerous acts which they may see on the screen.
Select “Parental Control” (
/
/
Select the desired rating and change the setting (
then ENTER).
/
G
General: Considered acceptable for all age groups.
Appropriate viewing for the entire family, contains
very little violence, physical, verbal or emotional.
Parental Control
TV Parental Guidelines
Age-Base
PG
Parental Guidance: Intended for a general audience,
but may not be suitable for younger children (under
the age of eight) because it could contain
controversial themes or issues.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Blocked TV Parental Guidelines
TV Parental Guidelines
Fantasy Violence
Violence
Sexual Situations
Home Menu
Exit
14+
18+
Over 14 Years: Could contain themes where violence
is one of the dominant elements of the storyline, but
it must be integral to the development of plot or
character. Language usage could be profane and
nudity present within the context of the theme.
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
password using buttons 0 to 9.
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
• All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.
Adults: Intended for viewers 18 years and older and
might contain depictions of violence, which while
related to the development of plot, character or
themes, are intended for adult viewing. Could
contain graphic language and portrayals of sex and
nudity.
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Blocking Not Rated TV programs
Use the following procedure to block TV programs whose rating
information is unavailable.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Parental Control” (
Select “Unavailable Ratings” (
Select “Block” or “Don’t Block” (
/
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
Parental Control
Unavailable Ratings
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Unavailable Ratings
Block
Don’t Block
Home Menu
Exit
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
password using buttons 0 to 9.
• The factory default is “Don’t Block”.
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuner Setup
09
Canadian French ratings
Setting Canadian French ratings
Rating Description
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
E
Exempt programming
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Canadian French Ratings” ( then ENTER).
G
General: All ages and children, contains minimal
direct violence, but may be integrated into the plot in
a humorous or unrealistic manner.
Select “Parental Control” (
/
/
8ans+
General but inadvisable for young children: May be
viewed by a wide public audience, but could contain
scenes disturbing to children under eight who
cannot distinguish between imaginary and real
situations. Recommended for viewing with parent.
Select the desired rating and change the setting (
then ENTER).
/
Parental Control
Canadian French Ratings
Age-Base
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Blocked Canadian French Ratings
E, G, 8 ans+, 13 ans+, 16 ans+, 18
ans+
13ans+ Over 13 years: Could contain scenes of frequent
violent scenes and therefore recommended for
viewing with parent.
Canadian French Ratings
E
G
8 ans+
Home Menu
Exit
16ans+ Over 16 years: Could contain frequent violent scenes
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
and intense violence.
password using buttons 0 to 9.
18ans+ Over 18 years: Only for adult viewing. Could contain
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
• All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.
frequent violent scenes and extreme violence.
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Setting Canadian English ratings
Note
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be
automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating
causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Canadian English Ratings” ( then ENTER).
Select “Parental Control” (
/
/
Setting new ratings
Select the desired rating and change the setting (
then ENTER).
/
Digital broadcasts are now carrying new ratings that are not
compatible with the plasma display’s original Parental Control
settings. When you first tune in one of these broadcasts, a New
Parental Control menu appears on the screen. This tells you that
you must now change your Parental Control settings to handle
these new ratings. Otherwise, ratings you had previously blocked
may become unblocked.
Parental Control
Canadian English Ratings
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Blocked Canadian English Ratings
Canadian English Ratings
E
C
C8+
Home Menu
Exit
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
password using buttons 0 to 9.
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
• All the ratings have been unblocked before shipment.
Select “Parental Control” (
/
Parental Control
Status
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Status
MPAA Ratings
TV Ratings
New XXXXXXXXXXXXX
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Home Menu
Exit
Note
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be
automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating
causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.
• The new menu is displayed when Status is selected and
the message “Regional ratings have changed. Set
Parental Control ratings again.” appears on the right of the
screen.
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuner Setup
09
4
Select the desired rating and change the setting (
then ENTER).
/
Temporarily deactivating the Parental Control
When the Parental Control is working and senses a blocked TV
program (or content), the plasma display shows nothing but a
message.
The method for temporarily deactivating the Parental Control
differs, depending on the currently selected input source.
New (xxx)
Parental Control
Unavailable Ratings
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
New (xxx)
New (xxx)
XX
XX
New (xxx)
Password
Home Menu
Exit
Antenna A or antenna B:
The following screen appears. Press ENTER.
• The menu is added between “Unavailable Ratings” and
“Password”.
Parental Control
WWWWWWW
1000.0000
(Ant. B)
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
password using buttons 0 to 9.
• Each time you press ENTER, the setting is switched.
• A lock icon appears beside the blocked rating.
Enter Disable Parental Control
• When you are finished, the word “New” disappears from
the Parental Control menu.
Enter your four-digit password.
Parental Control
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Enter your Password
A
Clear Entry
D
Cancel
Deleting new ratings
• The password entry screen stays only for one minute. After the
You can delete a New Parental Control menu. When deleted, the
past blocking settings you had entered are also cleared and
removed from the menu.
screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again.
INPUT 1 to INPUT 3:
Enter your four-digit password. You need not press ENTER first;
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
pressing ENTER causes the password entry screen to disappear.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Status” and then “Off” ( then ENTER).
Please InputYour Password.
Select “Parental Control” (
/
/
Parental Control
Status
Status
• The above password entry screen will also be shown during 2-
screen, picture-in-picture, and while freezing an image.
• The password entry screen stays only for one minute. After the
screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again.
• A password entry screen is displayed if you select “Block” in
“Unavailable Ratings” for INPUT 4 to INPUT 7.
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxx
Off
Enter your Password
Home Menu
Exit
A
Clear Entry
D
Cancel
• The password entry screen appears. Enter your four-digit
password using buttons 0 to 9.
5
Select A for “Accept” or D for “Cancel”.
Parental Control
Status
Status
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
Off
_ _ _ _
Reset Digital regional ratings?
Home Menu
Exit
A
Accept
D
Cancel
• The New Parental Control menu remains, however, when
the selection screen for deleting new ratings disappears in
approximately 60 seconds after no settings are entered.
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• While the Parental Control menu is opened, the status display
remains unchanged even if the system had received
broadcasts carrying new ratings.
• Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be
automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating
causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked.
41
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuner Setup
09
Item
Description
Setting your favorite channels
Off
(default)
Does not show closed captions
Set up to 10 TV channels to each of the four color buttons on the
remote control unit (40 channels in total). You can then quickly
select from only your favorite channels.
On
Always shows closed captions
On If Mute
Shows closed captions only while sound is being
muted
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select a color button (A, B, C, D) (
Select “Favorites” (
/
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Selecting the type of conventional closed
captions
Select a TV channel to be registered (
/
Select the type of conventional closed captions that you will
watch after tuning to a conventional TV channel. This selection
also becomes effective when a selected digital TV program
provides only conventional closed captions.
A
Favorites
Favorites
Favorites
B
A
B
A
B
8.0
9.0
9.0
11.0
11.0
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Current Favorites A Line Up
A
B0008.000
A0011.000
A0009.000
Home Menu
Exit
• “CC 1”, “CC 2”, “CC 3”, or “CC 4” displays subtitles of TV
dramas and news programs while allowing a full view of the
picture.
• “Text 1”, “Text 2”, “Text 3”, or “Text 4” superimposes on the
picture other information (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is
independent of the TV program in progress.
• A star appears beside the favorite channels currently
selected.
• To register another TV channel under the same color
button, repeat step 5. To register another TV channel under
a different color button, repeat steps 4 and 5.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
Select “Closed Captions” (
Select “Analog Settings” (
/
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Setting up closed captions
Your plasma display is equipped with an internal closed caption
decoder. Closed caption allows you to view conversations,
narration, and sound effects in TV programs and home videos as
subtitles on your plasma display screen.
You may enjoy digital closed captions when watching digital TV
programs. Digital closed captions allow you to change
parameters such as fonts and colors.
Select the desired closed caption (
/
then ENTER).
Closed Captions
Analog Settings
Analog Settings
CC1
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
CC2
CC3
CC4
Text 1
Home Menu
Exit
• Not all programs and videos offer closed caption. Please look
for the “
” symbol to ensure that captions will be shown.
• The factory default is “CC 1”.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
• No Closed Caption setting is available for any content played or
displayed in the Home Media Gallery.
6
Selecting digital closed captions
Activating the closed caption
Use the following procedure to select digital closed captions:
Service 1 to 6.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “On” or “On If Mute” (
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Closed Captions” (
Select “Status” (
/
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
Select “Closed Captions” (
Select “Digital Settings” (
Select “Digital Service” (
/
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
Closed Captions
Status
Status
Select the desired closed caption (
/
then ENTER).
Off
On
On If Mute
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Closed Captions
Digital Settings
Digital Settings
Digital Service
Digital Service
Home Menu
Exit
Service 1
Service 2
Service 3
Service 4
Service 5
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Home Menu
Exit
• The factory default is “Service 1”.
42
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuner Setup
09
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Clock Setting
With “Auto Set” selected for Clock Setting, the system acquires
and sets time information automatically. You can also manually
set the correct time. If you disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet or power blackout occurs, the set time is cleared.
Note
• The Primary Caption Service is usually offered for Service 1,
and the Secondary Language Service is usually offered for
Service 2 if these services are available.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Selecting digital closed caption parameters
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
Select “Clock” (
Select “Time Zone” (
Select a time zone for your area (
/
then ENTER).
Use the following procedure to change such parameters of
digital closed captions as font size, font type, foreground and
background colors.
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Clock
Time Zone
Select “Tuner Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Current Time:
9:55 pm EDT
Monday
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Atlantic
Eastern
Central
Time Zone
Select “Closed Captions” (
Select “Digital Settings” (
/
05/17/04
Mountain
/
Home Menu
Exit
Select “Font Size”, “Font”, or any other item (
ENTER).
/
then
6
7
Select “D.S.T.” (
,
/
, then ENTER).
6
Select the desired parameter (
/
then ENTER).
Select “Applies” or “Does Not Apply” (
/
then ENTER).
• When you start “Daylight Savings Time” mode, select
“Applies” for “D.S.T.” and select “Does Not Apply” when
you cancel it, otherwise the correct time will not be
displayed regardless of the “Auto/Manual Set” setting.
Closed Captions
Digital Settings
Digital Settings
Font Size
Font Size
Large
Standard
Small
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Home Menu
Exit
Clock
D.S.T.
Daylight Savings Time
Current Time:
9:56 pm EDT
Monday
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Applies
Does Not Apply
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary (
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
,
/
).
05/17/04
Home Menu
Exit
The following table shows the parameters selectable for each
item.
8
9
Select “Auto/Manual Set” (
,
/
, then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Auto Set” or “Manual Set” (
/
Item
Selection
10 If you select “Auto Set”, select an antenna (A or B) and
a channel number using and ENTER.
Font Size
Auto/ Large/ Standard/ Small
/
1
Auto/ Font 1/ Font 2/ Font 3/ Font 4/ Font 5/ Font 6/
Font 7
Font
Clock
Auto/Manual Set
Clock Set Channel
Current Time:
11:58 pm PDT
Monday
Font Color
Auto/ Black/ White/ Red/ Green/ Blue/ Yellow/
Magenta/ Cyan
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Auto/Manual Set •Auto Set
Ant. A
2.0
05/17/04
Font Opacity
Auto/ Solid/ Transparent/ Translucent/Flashing
Home Menu
Exit
Background
Color
Auto/ Black/ White/ Red/ Green/ Blue/ Yellow/
Magenta/ Cyan
• The date and time will be automatically corrected using
data from the selected channel.
If you select “Manual Set”, manually set the date and time
Background
Opacity
Auto/ Solid/ Transparent/ Translucent
using
/
,
/
and ENTER.
1 Font 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 2 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ Font 3
(monospaced without serifs)/ Font 4 (proportionally spaced without serifs)/ Font 5
(casual font)/ Font 6 (cursive font)/ Font 7 (small capitals font)
Clock
Auto/Manual Set
Date and Time
3
Current Time:
11:58 pm PDT
Monday
4
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Auto/Manual Set •Manual Set
3
5
6
/17/04 11:58pm
With “Auto” selected, parameters specified by the provider are
used; if not specified by the provider, the bolded default
parameters are used. If you select parameters other than “Auto”,
the selected parameters are used regardless of the provider’s
specifications.
05/17/04
Home Menu
Exit
11 Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• If you setup the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the plasma
display acquires clock information through the TV Guide On
Screen™ system; in this situation you cannot set up the clock
using the menu. If you select a parameter for the Clock menu
and press ENTER, the menu screen disappears and a dialog box
appears instead; press
A
to clear the dialog box.
43
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
Chapter 10
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
11 Channel logo & number – Identifies network and channel
Using the TV Guide On Screen™ system
number
12 Info Box – Shows information about the highlighted item.
Before you can start using the TV Guide On Screen™ system,
you’ll need to set it up. If you haven’t already done this, please
turn to “TV Guide On Screen™ System Setup” on page 32 before
proceeding.
13 Highlight – Indicates an active file, from which you can set
reminder, display a menu, etc.
TV Guide On Screen™ icons
Various icons are used to convey information or show the status
of an item. You will locate these icons on the Info Bar, inside the
Info Box, or beside program titles.
Legal Notices
In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks
of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada,
TV Guide is a registered mark of Transcontinental, Inc. and is used under
license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc.
•
•
Info icon – Additional information is available; press the
INFO button to display.
Note
Progress Bar – Shows the elapsed time of the current
program.
• The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide provides
listings for cable-ready and digital cable services as well as
over-the-air broadcast. It does not provide listings for satellite
services.
•
HDTV – Indicates that a program is a high-definition
broadcast.
• Once you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system it may take
up to 24 hours to begin to receive TV program listings. Receipt
of all eight days of listings may take up to one week.
• TV Guide may not be available in all areas. As content providers
move to digital programming and broadcasting, TV Guide data
may be unavailable or become unavailable.
•
•
New – The program is new (not a repeat).
Stereo – The program is broadcast in stereo.
•
•
CC – The program is broadcast with closed captioning.
Screen components
TV Rating – Indicates the age rating for the program.
Many of the screens have common elements to make using the
system easier.
•
•
Remind Once – One-time only reminder
1
2
3
4
5
Remind Daily – Reminds for the same channel and time
every Monday through Friday (manual reminder only).
6
7
9
•
•
•
Remind Regularly – Reminds the same program any day
it airs on the same channel at the same time.
8
Remind Weekly – Reminds every week at the same time/
day.
Remind Off – The program remains in the SCHEDULE list,
but will not remind until the frequency is changed to one of the
above.
10
12
11
13
1
2
3
4
5
TV GUIDE logo
Clock – Shows the current time.
Time slot – Half-hour time slots are displayed horizontally.
Time tab – Indicates the currently selected time slot.
Current service label – Indicates the currently selected
service.
6
7
Service bar – Gives access to the various services of the
Guide.
Info Bar – Shows various icons to convey information or
show the status of an item.
8
9
Title tile – Shows the title of the TV program.
Video window – Allows you to continue watching the
current program while using the Guide or to view the program
selected in the listings.
10 Panel ads and panel menu entry – Space for show or
product advertising (and the panel menu).
44
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
TV Guide On Screen™ navigation
1
Press TV GUIDE to display the Listings screen.
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons you’ll
use to navigate the TV Guide On Screen™ system.
Key
What it does
TV GUIDE
Press to display the TV Guide On Screen™ system
(also use to exit)
Use to navigate screens (highlight an item)
/
/
/
ENTER
Press to confirm a selection or execute an action.
Can also be used to display the panel menu when
a future program is highlighted.
• With “LISTINGS” highlighted in the Service bar at the top
of the screen, press INFO to display (and then close) Help
information.
MENU
INFO
Press to display a panel menu
Press to cycle through the available information
for the current program or screen
• Press TV GUIDE anytime to exit.
Number buttons
PAGE +/–
Use for numeric entry
2
Press
/
/
/
to navigate the Listings screen.
Press to select the previous/next page of
information (where applicable)
• With a currently showing program highlighted, press
ENTER to start watching.
• Move right for later time slots.
• Press PAGE+/– to scroll one vertical screen at a time.
DAY +/–
Press to jump to the next/previous day of program
listings (if applicable)
• Press INFO to display additional information (if available)
You can also use the TV GUIDE, ENTER, UP/DOWN, and LEFT/
about the currently selected program.
RIGHT buttons on the plasma display. The UP/DOWN and LEFT/
• Press DAY+/– to jump to the next/previous day in the
listings grid.
RIGHT buttons operate the same as the
/
and
/
buttons
on the remote control unit.
Setting program reminders
By setting a program reminder you can have the TV alert you
when a program is about to start on another channel. You can set
reminders for individual episodes of a program, or every time a
program airs.
1
From LISTINGS, SCHEDULE or SEARCH, highlight the
program for which you want to set a reminder.
The Listings screen
You can consider the Listings screen as the “home” screen of the
TV Guide On Screen™ system. This is the screen you see when
you press TV GUIDE.
From the Listings screen you can:
• View eight days of program listings.
• Display information about individual programs.
• Select a program to start watching.
• Set a program to remind.
• See a thumbnail display of any channel in the video window.
• Access panel and channel ads.
2
Press MENU to display the Episode Options menu.
45
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
When scheduled reminder is due (auto-tune is OFF)
3
4
Highlight “set reminder” and press ENTER.
Set the reminder options:
Depending on the settings you made, your program reminder will
appear on your TV screen around the time the program is
scheduled to start. This happens when you have selected “NO”
for the auto tune. The reminder will remain on-screen for three
minutes before it automatically disappears.
Press ENTER to tune to the highlighted program in the reminder;
or highlight “hide reminders” to dismiss the reminder.
Press
setting.
/
to highlight a field; press
/
to change the
• frequency – select whether to be reminded just Once,
Regularly (at the same time on the same channel), or
Weekly (every week at the same time/day). There’s also an
Off option which puts the program in the reminder
schedule but no reminder is given (you can set it to remind
later).
• auto tune – choose whether or not the TV should
automatically change channels when a reminder is due.
• when – set when the reminder is displayed (before, on
time, or after a program has started).
If more than one reminder is set for the same time, select the
program you want by pressing
/
.
Depending on the situation, the following screens will appear. In
this case, the reminder will remain on-screen for 15 seconds
before it automatically disappears.
5
Once all the settings have been made, press ENTER to
highlight “schedule reminder”, then press ENTER again.
Timer Alert
Tues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am
Ant. A 1000.000 BRAV022
A
D
Accept
Cancel Timer
Timer Alert
PLASMA DISPLAY
Wed. 1/5 4 : 06am- 9 : 08am
Ant.
A
1000. 5
BRAV022
D
A
Cancel Timer
Accept
• The reminder is now set (and will appear in SCHEDULE)
and the appropriate icon appears on the program tile.
Press A to leave the reminder effective, or D to dismiss the
reminder.
If there is a time conflict with a previously scheduled auto-tune
reminder, you will be alerted to this. You can select to set a
reminder for the conflicting program, or cancel the reminder. The
following screens appear depending on whether it will override a
scheduled reminder.
When scheduled reminder is due (auto-tune is ON)
If the “auto-tune” setting was set to “yes” in the Remind Options,
one of the following screens appears, depending on the situation.
The screen will remain for 15 seconds before it automatically
disappears.
REMINDER CONFLICT!
Timer Alert
Auto-tuning “Law & Order”
will override the recording
for “Friends”.
Tues. 12/30 12:30am-12:59am
Ant. A 1000.000 BRAV022
A
Accept
Timer Alert
PLASMA DISPLAY
auto-tune anyway
Wed. 1/5 4 : 06am- 9 : 08am
remind, no auto-tune
don’t set this reminder
Ant.
A
1000. 5
BRAV022
A
Accept
Press A to make the Timer Alert screen disappear.
46
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
4
Press ENTER to display a listing of upcoming programs
that match the categories you chose.
Searching for programs
The Search screen lets you search for programs alphabetically,
by category or by keyword. You can also search for HDTV
programs.
Searching by category
Here you can search for programs by category, and then by a
further sub-category if you want.
1
Select “SEARCH” from the Service bar at the top of the
screen.
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then press
/
to select a search category.
5
Highlight a program listing and press MENU to display
the Episode Options panel menu.
• Available categories may include:
•Movies
•Sports
•Children
•Educational
•News
• If the program listing is a program now being broadcast you
can press ENTER to start watching it immediately.
•Variety
•Series
•HDTV
3
Press to move to the search sub-categories and select
the sub-category you want.
• The sub-categories available depend on the category you
chose in the last step.
47
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
• Highlight characters by pressing
/
/
/
, then
Searching by keyword
pressing ENTER to input them.
Here you search for shows based on keywords you enter. The
keywords you create are stored so you can use them again in the
future.
• The keyword you input is stored so that you can use it
again whenever you need it.
8
9
Select “DONE” to start the search.
1
Select “SEARCH” from the Service bar at the top of the
screen.
Highlight a program listing, then press MENU to display
the Episode Options panel menu.
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then press
/
to select “KEYWORD”.
• If the program listing is a program now being broadcast you
can press ENTER to start watching it immediately.
• If you already entered any keywords, they are displayed.
Just select one if you want to search for it again.
• To edit or delete one of the displayed keywords, highlight it
and then press MENU. From the panel menu you can
choose “edit search” or “delete search”.
Alphabetical search
This search is designed to display all programs that start with a
particular letter.
3
Press ENTER to display the Keyword Search menu.
1
Select “SEARCH” from the Service bar at the top of the
screen.
2
Press to move to the search category bar, then press
/
to select “ALPHABETICAL”.
4
5
Select “new search”.
If you want to change the category, move up and select
the category you want.
• To search using only the keyword, leave the category set to
“All”.
• If you select a category (“HDTV”, for example) then you’ll
only see programs in that category that also match the
keyword.
6
7
Highlight “enter keyword” and press ENTER.
Input the keyword for the search.
48
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
3
4
Press ENTER.
Scheduling reminders
Select a letter, then press ENTER to display all programs
starting with that letter.
From the Schedule area you can review, edit or delete reminders.
1
Select “SCHEDULE” from the Service bar at the top of
the screen.
5
Highlight a program listing and press MENU to display
the Episode Options panel menu.
A list of programs that have remind events scheduled appears.
The icons on the right side indicate the status of the events.
• If the program listing is a program now being broadcast you
can press ENTER to start watching it immediately.
•
•
Once only reminder
The search Episode Options menu
Daily Reminds for the same channel and time every
Monday through Friday (manual reminder only)
From the Episode Options menu you can select:
• go to Service bar – closes the panel menu and returns to the
Service bar at the top of the screen.
• tune to channel / watch now – exits the TV Guide On
Screen™ guide and tunes to the channel.
•
Regularly – Reminds the same program any day it airs on
the same channel at the same time .
1
• set reminder – goes to the Remind Options menu.
• cancel – closes the panel menu and returns to the highlighted
program listing.
•
•
1
Weekly reminder (every week at the same time/day)
Off: The program remains in the SCHEDULE list, but will
not remind until the frequency is changed to one of the above.
Navigation and search tips
The reminder will still appear if the program starts any time up
to the midway point of the original schedule. For example, up
to 9:15 for a 9:00 to 9:30 program.
• The
/
buttons move the highlight between options in the
panel menu. Use the number buttons to input information.
• If a highlighted field has arrows on either side, press
cycle through the options.
/
to
2
Highlight a program in the list and press MENU to
display the Schedule Options panel menu.
• Press ENTER on any option to highlight the default command
(e.g., Done), then press ENTER again to execute and close the
panel menu.
• Select Cancel and press ENTER to close the panel menu and
return to the previous screen, or press MENU to cancel any
changes and close the menu.
• When you highlight a program in the list you’ll see
information related to that program appear in the Info Box.
49
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
Using the reminder To Do list
Changing setup options
The To Do screen lists scheduled events with an icon that
identifies the event type. From the To Do screen you can review,
edit, or delete reminder events that you previously set. You can
sort the scheduled events by date, title, or event type. You can
also schedule a manual reminder.
You can change TV Guide On Screen™ settings from the Setup
menu. Setup options are divided into three categories: system
settings, channel display, default options, and display setup
progress.
1
Select “SETUP” from the Service bar at the top of the
screen.
The Schedule Optios menu
The Schedule Options menu is accessible by pressing MENU
when either “SCHEDULE” is highlighted in the Service bar, or a
program is highlighted.
When “SCHEDULE” is highlighted in the service bar:
• go to Service Bar – closes the panel menu and returns to the
Service bar at the top of the screen.
• sort by – select a sort order for the program listings.
• new manual reminder – select and then fill in all the
necessary fields to set the reminder. Select “schedule
reminder” when you’re done to save and exit, or select “cancel”
to exit without saving.
• done – closes the panel menu and returns to the Service bar
at the top of the screen.
• cancel – closes the panel menu without saving any changes
and returns to the Service bar at the top of the screen.
Changing the system settings
The system settings include your ZIP/postal code and your cable
TV setup.
When a program is highlighted:
1
Highlight the “Change system settings” item.
• go to Service Bar – closes the panel menu and returns to the
Service bar at the top of the screen.
• watch now – start watching the selected program (this option
is “tune to channel” for a program that isn’t showing now).
• cancel – closes the panel menu and returns to the highlighted
program listing.
For reminder:
• delete reminder – remove the reminder from the schedule
(requires confirmation).
• edit reminder – edit the reminder settings (opens the Remind
Options menu).
As you highlight an option you can see the settings you can
adjust in that area:
• System settings – ZIP/postal code, cable setup, etc.
• Channel display – Channel position, tuning channel,
display on/off, etc.
• Default options – General and reminder defaults
• Display setup progress – Status of various Guide setup
functions
50
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
2
Press ENTER to display the current settings and the
options to change them.
2
Press ENTER to display the channel editor.
3
Press
/
to highlight a channel then press ENTER to go
3
Select one of the options, then follow the on-screen
instructions.
to the Grid Options menu.
• Yes, everything is correct: displays a helpful information
screen. Press ENTER to quit the TV Guide On Screen™.
• Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect: displays a screen
from which you may choose the correct channel lineup.
Press ENTER to display the Channel Editor screen.
• No, repeat setup process: displays Screen 1 shown on
page 33.
Changing the channel display settings
From the channel display settings you can set/change:
• the display setting to always display (On), never display (Off), or
display only when channel information is available (Auto Hide).
• the tuned channel number.
• the channel position in the channel listing.
From the Grid Options menu you can set:
• channel – On (display in channel list), Off (don’t display)
or Auto Hide (hide when no program information is
available)
• tune channel – the channel number that the channel
listing is tuned to
1
Highlight the “Change channel display” item.
• position – place that the channel appears in the channel
list
• Re-sort numerically to change the channel order in the
Listings service (and Channel Editor) to numeric
• Undo all changes to reset all the Channel Editor options
(and Listings display) to their original (factory) settings
4
When you’ve made all the settings you want for the
channel, highlight “done” then press ENTER.
• To cancel without saving any of the changes you made,
select “cancel”.
51
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV Guide On Screen™ System Operation
10
Changing the default options
Displaying setup progress
This is the place to change the default settings for reminders and
other general settings.
Display setup progress lets you verify the status of the various
Guide setup functions. This screen also appears when you enter
the Guide prior to receiving the complete channel lineup.
1
Select the “Change default options” item.
2
Select one of the two default option categories.
A different panel menu appears for each option:
General default options
• Info Box size upon entering the Guide
- Small
- Large
- No
- Last used (default)
• Info Box position
- Float
- Top (default)
• Video Window status
- Locked (default)
- Unlocked
• Channel ID in Listings
- Logo
- Number
- Both (default)
• Auto guide (whether Guide appears automatically when
the unit is powered On)
- On
- Off (default)
Remind defaults
• auto tune – automatically tunes to the correct channel when
a reminder becomes due (Yes or No)
• when – when to display the reminder (15 minutes early to 15
minutes late, or On time)
3
When you’ve made all the settings you want, highlight
“done” then press ENTER.
• To cancel without saving any of the changes you made,
select “cancel”.
52
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
Chapter 11
Adjustments and Settings
Item
Description
AV Selection
MOVIE
For movies.
Select from the seven viewing options, depending on the current
This selection is shared by the external input and TV
input sources.
environment (e.g., room brightness), the type of the current TV
program, or the type of images input from external equipment.
PURE
Reflects input signals as faithfully as possible.
For example, you may select this option to check image
materials.
1
Press AV SELECTION.
• The current AV Selection mode appears.
GAME
USER
Lowers image brightness for easier viewing.
This selection is shared by the external input and TV
input sources.
2
Press AV SELECTION again before the displayed mode
disappears.
• For AV source, the mode is switched in this order;
OPTIMUM, STANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, PURE, GAME,
then USER.
Allows you to customize settings as desired. You can set
the mode for each input source.
• For PC source, the mode is switched between STANDARD
and USER.
For PC source
Item
Description
You can also use the menu to change the options.
STANDARD
USER
For a highly defined image in a normally bright room
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
Select “AV Selection” (
Allows you to customize settings as desired. You can set
the mode for each input source.
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
Select the desired option (
/
AV Selection
• You can also press AV SELECTION on the remote control unit
to switch the viewing option.
• If you have selected “DYNAMIC”, you cannot select “Contrast”,
“Brightness”, “Color”, “Tint”, “Sharpness”, “Pro Adjust” and
“Reset”; these menu items are dimmed.
• If you have selected “OPTIMUM”, you cannot select “Pro
Adjust”; menu items in “Pro Adjust” are dimmed.
• To prevent the screen from damage, you can freely change the
AV selection mode while enjoying the Home Media Gallery
function. However, when you resume the Home Media Gallery
after having quit it, “STANDARD” is automatically selected for
the AV source.
• While enjoying the Home Media Gallery, you can freely change
the AV selection mode, but you cannot select “USER”.
OPTIMUM
STANDARD
DYNAMIC
MOVIE
PURE
GAME
USER
• As the OPTIMUM function automatically optimizes image
quality, the process in which image settings such as
brightness and tint gradually change may be seen on the
screen. This is not a malfunction.
For AV source
Item
Description
• When “OPTIMUM” is selected, images are reproduced based
on the information collected at the Room Light Sensor as well,
regardless of its setting (“On” or “Off”) for the “Option” menu.
OPTIMUM
Automatically adjusts the brightness of the image to the
optimum level in accordance with the brightness level of
the viewing area.
This selection is shared by the external input and TV
input sources.
STANDARD
DYNAMIC
For a highly defined image in a normally bright room.
This selection is shared by the external input and TV
input sources.
For a very sharp image with maximum contrast.
This mode does not allow manual image quality
adjustment.
This selection is shared by the external input and TV
input sources.
53
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
Basic picture adjustments
11
For AV source
Item
button
button
Adjust the picture to your preference for the chosen AV Selection
option (except DYNAMIC).
Contrast
Brightness
Color
For less contrast
For more contrast
For more brightness
For more color intensity
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
For less brightness
For less color intensity
/
then ENTER).
Select an item to be adjusted (
/
then ENTER).
Tint
Skin tones become
purplish
Skin tones become
greenish
Picture
Sharpness
For less sharpness
For more sharpness
AV Selection
Contrast
Brightness
Color
OPTIMUM
For PC source
40
0
Item
button
button
0
Contrast
Brightness
Red
For less contrast
For less brightness
For weaker red
For more contrast
For more brightness
For stronger red
For stronger green
For stronger blue
Tint
0
Sharpness
Pro Adjust
Reset
0
Green
For weaker green
For weaker blue
Blue
For PC source, the following screen appears:
Note
Picture
• To perform advanced picture adjustments, select “Pro Adjust”
in step 3 and then press ENTER. For the subsequent
AV Selection
Contrast
Brightness
Red
STANDARD
40
0
procedures see Advanced picture adjustments on page 55.
• To restore the factory defaults for all items, press
/
to select
“Reset” in step 3, and then press ENTER. A confirmation
0
screen appears. Press
/
to select “Yes”, and then press
Green
0
ENTER.
Blue
0
• Some functions, such as OPTIMUM, Room Light Sensor and
Intelligent Mode, are temporarily turned off when the “Picture”
menu is displayed. This may cause the screen brightness to
suddenly change as you open the menu.
Reset
• You may experience a sudden change in the image position
and screen brightness when you open the “Picture” menu.
4
5
Select the desired level (
/
).
Contrast
40
• When an adjustment screen is displayed, you can also
change the item to be adjusted, by pressing
/
.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
54
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
Advanced picture adjustments
11
Using Intelligent Mode
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
Select “Pro Adjust” (
Select “Intelligent Mode” (
Select the desired parameter (
The plasma display provides various advanced functions for
optimizing the picture quality. For details on these functions, see
the tables.
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
Using PureCinema
/
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
/
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Intelligent Mode
Select “Pro Adjust” (
Select “PureCinema” (
/
Performs such compensation that results in the optimum color tones and
brightness for images
/
Selections
Off
On
Deactivates Intelligent Mode
Activates Intelligent Mode
Select “Film Mode” or “Text Optimization” (
ENTER).
/
then
6
Select the desired parameter (
/
then ENTER).
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
• For the selectable parameters, see the table.
Note
PureCinema
Automatically detects a film-based source (originally encoded at 24
frames/second), analyzes it, then recreates each still film frame for high-
definition picture quality
• As this function automatically optimizes image quality, the
process in which image settings such as brightness and tint
gradually change may be seen on the screen. This is not a
malfunction.
Film Mode
Off
Deactivates the PureCinema
Using the Picture Detail
Standard
Produces smooth and vivid moving
images (film specific) by automatically
detecting recorded image information
when displaying DVD or high-definition
images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames
per second
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
Select “Pro Adjust” (
Select “Picture Detail” (
Select an item to be adjusted (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
Smooth
Produces smoother and more vivid
moving images
/
/
Advance
Produces smooth and quality moving
images (as shown on theatre screens) by
converting to 72 Hz when displaying DVD
images (e.g., movies) having 24 frames
per second
• You can select “DRE Picture”, “Black Level”, “ACL”,
“Enhancer Mode” or “Gamma”.
6
Select the desired parameter (
/
then ENTER).
DRE Picture
Text
Optimization
Off
On
Deactivates Text Optimization
Improves subtitle display quality
Emphasizes the contrast on images so that the difference between
brightness and darkness becomes more distinct
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Selections
Off
Deactivates DRE Picture
Enhanced DRE Picture
Standard DRE Picture
Moderate DRE Picture
High
Mid
Low
Note
• Standard” is not selectable for the following input signals:
480p, 720p@60 Hz, 1080p@60 Hz.
• “Smooth” is not selectable for the following input signals:
1080p@60 Hz.
Black Level
Emphasizes dark portion on images so that the difference between
brightness and darkness becomes more distinct
• “Advance” is not selectable for the following input signals:
1080p@60 Hz.
• When you select “On” for “Game Control Pref” on the “Option”
menu, the “PureCinema” setting is disabled.
Selections
Off
On
Deactivates Black Level
Activates Black Level
ACL
Performs such compensation that results in the optimum contrast
characteristics for images
Selections
Off
On
Deactivates ACL
Activates ACL
55
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
• To perform adjustment for another item, press RETURN,
Enhancer Mode
and then repeat steps 7 and 8.
Selects processing of the image’s high frequency (detailed) areas
• You may press
adjusted.
/
to immediately change an item to be
Selections
1
2
3
Selects Hard (SHARPNESS) image
Selects Natural (SHARPNESS) image
Selects Soft (SHARPNESS) image
9
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Using CTI and Color Space
Gamma
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
Adjusts the gamma characteristics (image gradation characteristics)
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Selections
1
2
3
Selects gamma characteristics 1
Selects gamma characteristics 2
Selects gamma characteristics 3
Select “Pro Adjust” (
Select “Color Detail” (
/
/
Select “CTI” or “Color Space” (
Select the desired parameter (
/
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
CTI
Using Color Temp
Provides images with clearer color contours. The CTI stands for Color
Transient Improvement.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
Selections
Off
On
Deactivates CTI
Activates CTI
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Pro Adjust” (
Select “Color Detail” (
Select “Color Temp” (
/
Color Space
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Changes color reproduction space
/
Selections
1
2
Optimized for vivid, vibrant color reproduction
Standard color reproduction
Select the desired parameter (
/
then ENTER).
Color Temp
Adjusts the color temperature, resulting in a better white balance
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Selections
High
White with bluish tone
Using Color Management
Mid-High
Mid
Intermediate tone between High and Mid
Natural tone
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Mid-Low
Low
Intermediate tone between Mid and Low
White with reddish tone
Select “Pro Adjust” (
Select “Color Detail” (
/
/
Manual
Color temperature adjusted to your
preference
Select “Color Management” (
Select an item to be adjusted (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
• You may rather want to perform fine adjustment. To do
this, select “Manual” first and then press and hold ENTER
for more than three seconds. The manual adjustment
screen appears. Then go to step 7.
Color Management
R
Y
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
8
Select an item to be adjusted (
Select the desired level ( ).
/
then ENTER).
/
G
C
B
M
Item
R High
button
button
For weaker red
For weaker green
For weaker blue
For weaker red
For weaker green
For weaker blue
For stronger red
For stronger green
For stronger blue
For stronger red
For stronger green
For stronger blue
Fine adjustment
G High for bright
portions
7
Select the desired level (
/
).
B High
R Low
Fine adjustment
for dark portions
G Low
B Low
56
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
Using the 3DYC and I-P Mode
Item
button
button
R
Closer to magenta
Closer to red
Closer to yellow
Closer to green
Closer to cyan
Closer to blue
Closer to magenta
Closer to red
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
Select “Pro Adjust” (
Select “Others” (
Y
G
C
/
then ENTER).
Closer to yellow
Closer to green
Closer to cyan
Closer to blue
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
B
Select “3DYC” or “I-P Mode” (
Select the desired parameter (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
M
/
• To adjust another item, press RETURN then repeat steps 6
and 7.
3DYC
Optimizes characteristics for separating brightness signals and color
signals. This works for both video and still images.
• Press
/
to select another item for adjustment.
8
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Selections
Off
Deactivates 3DYC
Enhanced 3DYC
Standard 3DYC
Moderate 3DYC
High
Mid
Low
Eliminating noise from images
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
Select “Pro Adjust” (
Select “Noise Reduction” (
Select an item to be adjusted (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
I-P Mode
/
Perform optimum conversion from interlace signals to progressive
signals. This works for both video and still images.
/
/
Selections
1
2
3
Optimum for video images
Standard setting
• You can select “3DNR”, “Field NR”, “Block NR” or
“Mosquito NR”.
6
Select the desired parameter (
/
then ENTER).
Optimum for still images
3DNR
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Eliminates video noise for clean crisp images. 3DNR stands for 3-
dimensional Noise Reduction.
Note
Selections
Off
Deactivates 3DNR
Enhanced 3DNR
Standard 3DNR
Moderate 3DNR
• The I-P Mode setting is disabled if you use an external input
source and select “On” for “Game Control Pref” on the “Option”
menu.
• For the I-P Mode, the individual parameters are not selectable
for the following input signals: 480p, 720p, 1080p.
High
Mid
Low
• The 3DYC setting is selectable when composite video or analog
TV signals are received.
Field NR
Removes glimmer for more natural images
Selections
Off
Deactivates Field NR
Enhanced Field NR
Standard Field NR
Moderate Field NR
High
Mid
Low
Block NR
Helps reduce noise appearing in high-definition images
Selections
Off
On
Deactivates Block NR
Activates Block NR
Mosquito NR
Reduces mosquito noise in DVD and high-definition images, resulting in
noise-free images
Selections
Off
On
Deactivates Mosquito NR
Activates Mosquito NR
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
57
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
Comparing picture adjustments on the
screen
Sound adjustments
You can adjust the sound quality to your preference with the
following settings.
During picture adjustments, you can quickly refer to the image
previously set in the same parameter, allowing you to easily
compare and select the preferred image quality.
Adjust the sound to your preference for the chosen AV Selection
option. See page 53.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Picture” (
Select an item to be adjusted (
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Sound” (
Select an item to be adjusted (
Select the desired level ( ).
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
/
).
While performing adjustment, press BLUE on the
remote control unit.
/
“Before” displays and the image adjusted last time appears for
comparison.
Sound
Treble
STANDARD
Before
2
0
0
5
Press the button again to return to the newly adjusted
image.
Bass
Balance
Reset
Each press of the button toggles between “Before” and “After”.
6
7
Repeat steps 1 and 5 for other parameters.
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Sound Effect
Caution
• If you exit the menu by pressing HOME MENU or no operation
is performed for 60 seconds, all the parameter settings
displayed last are stored in memory.
• If you want to exit the menu without performing the
adjustments (or leaving the settings disabled) on the “After”
screen, switch to “Before” and then exit.
Item
button
button
Treble
Bass
For weaker treble
For weaker bass
For stronger treble
For stronger bass
Balance
Shifts the audio balance to Shifts the audio balance to
the left the right
Note
• You cannot adjust any item while on the “Before” screen. A
warning message appears.
• When you switch to another parameter, make sure to change
the display from “Before” to “After” first, otherwise you cannot
select “Before”. A warning message appears if you don’t.
• If you exit the selection from the “Before” screen, the previous
entry is stored in the memory and the button no longer works.
• If you exit the selection from the “After” screen, the new entry
is stored in the memory and the button no longer works.
• If you move and change the “AV Selection” parameter, the new
entry in the current parameter is stored in the memory and the
button continues to work.
• You cannot compare images between different parameters on
the “AV Selection” menu (“STANDARD” and “MOVIE”, for
example).
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• You cannot adjust the sound for listening with headphones.
• If you perform sound adjustments with headphones
connected, the new settings will become effective as soon as
you disconnect the headphones.
• To restore the factory defaults for all the items, press
/
to
select “Reset” in step 3, and then press ENTER. A confirmation
screen appears. Press
ENTER.
/
to select “Yes”, and then press
• When you select this function, “OPTIMUM” on the “AV
Selection” menu, “Intelligent Mode” for “Pro Adjust” on the
“Picture” menu and “Room Light Sensor” on the “Option”
menu are set to off and image quality returns to default
settings.
• This function is not selectable:
- when you select “AV Selection”,
- when you select “Yes” or “No” on the confirmation screen for
“Reset” from the “Picture” menu or
- when you select a menu from the PC source
58
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
Sound Effect
You can select from SRS FOCUS, SRS or SRS TruBass.
Power Control
Power Control provides convenient functions for saving power.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Sound” (
Select “Sound Effect” (
Select “SRS FOCUS”, “SRS” or “SRS TruBass” (
Select the desired parameter ( ).
Energy Save
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
You may use one of the three Energy Save modes to save power
consumption.
/
).
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
/
Select “Power Control” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Energy Save” (
/
SRS FOCUS
Selections
®
Off
On
Deactivates SRS FOCUS
Select “Mode 1”, “Mode 2”, or “Picture Off” (
ENTER).
/
then
®
Activates SRS FOCUS
Shifts the apparent direction of the sound
upward for more clearly defined sound
Item
Off
Description
Does not decrease picture brightness
SRS
Mode 1
Slightly lowers power consumption while slightly
suppressing the brightness drop level
®
Selections
Off
On
Deactivates SRS
®
Mode 2
Decreases the picture brightness and lowers power
consumption
Activates SRS
Reproduces highly effective
three-dimensional sound
Picture Off
Deactivates the screen to save power. To restore the
screen display, press any button other than VOL +/–
and MUTING.
SRS TruBass
®
This setting is not memorized by the system.
Selections
Off
On
Deactivates SRS TruBass
®
Activates SRS TruBass
Provides deep, rich bass using a new
technology
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
• When you change the Energy Save mode, you may notice a
change in the panel sound. This is normal.
• Energy Save maintains efficiency of the screen for a long
period of time by decreasing picture brightness and lowering
power consumption. Setting Energy Save to “Mode 1” is
recommended for increased efficiency.
Note
®
•
(WOW) denotes a status where SRS FOCUS ,
®
®
SRS and SRS TruBass are on.
• You cannot adjust the sound effect for listening with
headphones.
No Signal off (AV source only)
• If you change the sound effect with headphones connected,
the new setting will become effective as soon as you
disconnect the headphones.
The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode if
no signal is received for 15 minutes.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
• The effect of this function differs depending on signals.
Select “Power Control” (
Select “No Signal off” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
Select “Enable” (
/
then ENTER).
Item
Description
Disable
Does not place the system into the standby mode
(default)
Enable
Places the system into the standby mode if no signal
is received for 15 minutes
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• Five minutes before the system is placed into the standby
mode, a message appears every minute.
• The system may not be placed into the standby mode when
noise signals are present at the plasma display after a TV
program finishes.
59
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
No Operation off (AV source only)
Sleep Timer
The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode
when no operation is performed for three hours.
When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically
places the system into the standby mode.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
• The factory default is “Off”.
Select “Power Control” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.
Select “No Operation off” (
Select “Enable” (
/
Select “Sleep Timer” (
/
then ENTER).
/ then ENTER).
/
Select the desired time (
Item
Description
• Select “Off” (cancel), “30 min”, “60 min”, “90 min” or “120 min”.
Disable
Does not place the system into the standby mode
(default)
4
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Enable
Places the system into the standby mode if no
operation is performed for three hours
Note
• Five minutes before the selected time elapses, the remaining
time appears every minute.
• To check the remaining time, perform steps 1 and 2. After
checking the time, press HOME MENU to restore the previous
display.
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• Five minutes before the system is placed into the standby
mode, a message appears every minute.
• The SLEEP indicator on the front of the plasma display lights
orange when the sleep timer is set.
Power Management (PC source only)
About “Option” menus
The “Option” menu consists of two screens. To select the desired
The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode
when no signal is received from the personal computer.
menu, press
/
repeatedly to switch between Screen 1 and
Screen 2. The current screen number appears at the top right
corner on the screen.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Power Control” (
/
then ENTER).
Option
Position
1/2
Select “Power Management” (
Select “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” (
/
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Auto Size
Wide-Zoom
Item
Description
Side Mask
Off
No power management
HDMI Input
(default)
Mode 1
HDMI Control Setting
Blue LED Dimmer
Orbiter
• Places the system into the standby mode when no
signal is received from the personal computer for
eight minutes.
Auto
On
• Even when you start using the computer and a
signal is received again, the system stays off.
• The system is switched on again by pressing
STANDBY/ON on the plasma display or TV on
the remote control unit.
Video Pattern
Option
2/2
Digital Audio Out
Language
Dolby Digital
Mode 2
• Places the system into the standby mode when no
signal is received for eight seconds.
• When you start using the computer and a signal is
received again, the system is switched on.
• The system is switched on again by pressing
STANDBY/ON on the plasma display or TV on
the remote control unit.
Tuner NR Setting
Game Control Pref
Room Light Sensor
Off
On
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
(For AV source)
• This function is not selectable when the PC is connected to the
HDMI terminal.
60
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
Image position adjustment (AV source only) Manual image position and clock
adjustments (PC source only)
Adjusts the horizontal and vertical positions of images on the
plasma display.
Usually you can easily adjust the positions and clock of images
using Auto Setup. Use Manual Setup to optimize the positions
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
and clock of images when necessary.
Select “Option” (
Select “Position” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “Manual Setup” (
/
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “H/V Position Adjust” (
/
then ENTER).
/
Position
Select an item to be adjusted (
/
then ENTER).
H/V Position Adjust
Reset
Manual Setup
H/V Position Adjust
Clock
0
0
5
6
Adjust the vertical position (
/
) or horizontal position
Phase
(
/
).
Reset
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
5
6
Perform adjustment (
• With “Clock” or “Phase” selected, you can change the
parameter using
/
or
/
).
• To restore the factory defaults for all the items, press
select “Reset” in step 4, and then press ENTER. A confirmation
screen appears. Press
ENTER.
/
to
/
.
/
to select “Yes”, and then press
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
• Adjustments are stored separately for each input source.
• Depending on the displayed video, the image position may not
change even after adjustment.
Note
• To restore the factory defaults for all the items, press
select “Reset” in step 4, and then press ENTER. A confirmation
/
to
screen appears. Press
/
to select “Yes”, and then press
Automatic image position and clock
adjustments (PC source only)
ENTER.
• This function is not selectable when the PC is connected to the
HDMI terminal.
Use Auto Setup to automatically adjust positions and clock of
images coming from a personal computer.
Reducing video noise
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
For the individual analog TV channels, you can specify whether
the plasma display should reduce video noise depending on the
levels of broadcasting signals.
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Auto Setup” (
/
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “Tuner NR Setting” (
Select “Channel Map” (
Option
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Auto Setup
/
Manual Setup
/
).
• Auto Setup starts.
You can select only analog channels set by the Auto Channel
Preset or POD.
4
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
5
6
Select “Tuner NR” (
Select “On” ( ).
/
).
Note
/
• When Auto Setup is finished, “Auto Setup completed.”
appears.
HTuner NR Setting ANT.A
• Even when “Auto Setup completed.” appears, Auto Setup may
Channel Map
Tuner NR
7
have failed, depending on conditions.
• Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar
patterns or monochrome. If not successful, change the PC
image and try again.
On
Channel Keep/Skip
Keep
• Be sure to connect the computer to the plasma display and
switch it on before starting Auto Setup.
• Depending on the displayed video, the image position may not
change even after adjustment.
• This function is not selectable when the PC is connected to the
HDMI terminal.
Item
Description
On (default)
Off
Activates Tuner NR
Deactivates Tuner NR
61
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
PC source
7
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Item
4:3
Description
Note
Fills the screen without altering the input signal aspect
ratio
• This function is only selectable when signals are received
through ANT.A or ANT.B.
• The “Channel Keep/Skip” menu is not selectable. “Keep” or
“Skip” is displayed when the setting in “Channel Map” is
changed.
FULL
Full 16:9 screen display
Note
• This function may not achieve satisfactory results, depending
on the conditions of broadcasting signals.
• While watching High Definition TV broadcasting, pressing
SCREEN SIZE switches among FULL, ZOOM, WIDE, and 4:3.
• If you watch High Definition TV broadcasting with WIDE
selected, part of the screen (e.g., images, graphic interface)
may not appear on the display. If this is the case, select FULL.
• Some HD broadcasts may display 4:3 content with side masks,
which may cause uneven wear. After viewing, it is
recommended to view full screen motion video (see Detecting
side masks on page 63).
• The selectable screen sizes may differ depending on the
conditions.
• You can freely change the screen size while watching HD
broadcasts or enjoying other HD input sources. However,
when you resume the HD programs after having quit them,
“FULL” is automatically selected for the screen size.
Selecting a game mode
When playing a game, you can use this function to establish a
preference for image quality or operability.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “Game Control Pref” (
Select “On” or “Off” ( then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
/
Item
On
Off
Description
Establishes a preference for operability
Establishes a preference for image quality
• The specifications given for the PC source is for the PRO-
1150HD. For the PRO-950HD, the number of panel pixels is
different, and thus signal processing and actual viewing
conditions will vary slightly.
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
• It is not recommended to consistently display signals that do
not completely fill the screen. This may cause temporary or
permanent image retention depending on the frequency and
duration.
Note
• The “Game Control Pref” is only available when using an
external input (except a PC source) and “GAME” is selected in
“AV Selection”.
• The “Game Control Pref” options are not effective when PC
signals are received (when a PC source menu is displayed on
the screen).
AV source
PC source
4:3
• The “On” setting is not effective when freezing images or in the
multiscreen mode.
4:3
Selecting a screen size manually
WIDE
FULL
CINEMA
ZOOM
In single-screen mode, press SCREEN SIZE to change the size of
the screen from among the selectable options for the type of
video signals currently received.
• The selectable screen sizes differ depending on the types of
input signals.
FULL
AV source
Item
4:3
Description
For 4:3 “standard” pictures. A side bar appears on each
side
WIDE
In this mode pictures are progressively stretched toward
each side of the screen
FULL
For 16:9 squeezed pictures
ZOOM
For 16:9 letterbox pictures. Bars may appear on the top
and bottom on some programs
CINEMA
For 14:9 letterbox pictures. Bars may appear on the top
and bottom on some programs
62
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
11
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Selecting a screen size automatically
The plasma display automatically selects an appropriate screen
size when video signals are received from a connected HDMI
device (see page 66). To activate this function, use the following
procedure.
Important
• The “On” setting prevents uneven wear on 4:3 content and side
masks and can reduce the possibility of image retention.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option“ (
Select “Auto Size“ (
Select “Natural” or “Wide-Zoom” (
Note
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
• You cannot set the Side Mask detection to “On” or “Off” when
“Off” is selected in “Auto Size”.
• Set the Side Mask detection function to “On”. The High
Definition 16:9 aspect ratio images containing side masks will
be detected automatically and side masks will be added or the
image displayed in full screen.
• This Side Mask detection does not operate on 4:3 content
displayed in SD (standard definition) broadcasts.
• “AUTO” will appear on the channel display when this function
is on.
/
/
then ENTER).
Item
Off
Description
Deactivates the Auto Size function
Natural
Naturally adjusts the image to the screen
Wide-Zoom
Enlarges and displays only the 4:3 aspect ratio portion in
full and wide screen
• Detection errors may occur depending on the HD content. In
case a detection error occurs, manually change the screen size
to the desired size.
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
• The Side Mask detection function may not operate properly for
video signals that contain no aspect ratio information. If that is
the case, check if “FULL” is selected for the screen size, switch
to another input source, then switch back to the original input
source again.
Note
• Manually select an appropriate screen size if an image does
not automatically switch to a correct screen format.
• When the video signal contains no aspect ratio information,
the function will not work even with “Natural” or “Wide-Zoom”
selected.
Changing the brightness at both sides of
the screen (Side Mask)
Detecting side masks
With the 4:3 screen size, you can change the brightness of the
gray side masks that appear at both sides of the screen.
Some HD broadcasts may display 4:3 content with side masks.
The plasma display automatically detects these side masks to
provide gray side masks when “Natural” has been selected for
“Auto Size”, or display the image full screen with the side masks
removed when “Wide-Zoom” has been selected. This function
does not operate when “Off” is selected for “Auto Size”.
1
2
3
Repeat steps 1 to 3 in Detecting side masks.
Select “Brightness Sync.” ( ).
/
Select the desired parameter (
/
).
Item
Description
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option“ (
Fixed (default) Always sets the same brightness for the gray side masks
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
).
Auto
Adjusts the brightness of the gray side masks according to
the brightness of images
Select “Side Mask“ (
Select “Detection” (
/
/
Select “On” (
/
).
Important
• The “Auto” setting adjusts the brightness of the side masks
according to the brightness of the screen and can reduce the
possibility of image retention.
Item
Description
Off
On
Deactivates the Side Mask detection
Activates the Side Mask detection
4
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
63
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustments and Settings
Room Light Sensor
11
Video Pattern
This function automatically adjusts the brightness of the display
panel in accordance with the brightness level of the viewing area.
For details, use the following procedure.
You can display the Video Pattern screen that also helps
eliminate after-image when it occurs.
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “Video Pattern” (
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “Room Light Sensor” (
Select “On” or “Off” ( then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
/
A confirmation screen appears.
Select “Start” (ENTER).
/
4
The Video Pattern screen displays.
Item
On
Off
Description
Activates the Room Light Sensor function
Deactivates the Room Light Sensor function
Note
• The system is automatically placed into standby one hour after
the Video Pattern screen has started.
• While the Video Pattern screen is on, no buttons operate
except TVa on the remote control unit, STANDBY/ON and a
on the plasma display.
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• This function is disabled when “OPTIMUM” is selected on the
“AV Selection” menu.
• To cancel the Video Pattern screen, press TVa on the remote
control unit, STANDBY/ON or a on the plasma display.
• This function is not available when PC signals are received.
• The Video Pattern timer has priority over the sleep timer. When
the Video Pattern timer is on, the sleep timer becomes ineffective.
• As this function automatically optimizes image quality, the
process in which image settings such as brightness and tint
gradually change may be seen on the screen. This is not a
malfunction.
Language setting
You can select a language to be used for on-screen display such
as menus from among three languages: English, French, and
Spanish.
Blue LED Dimmer
You can adjust the brightness of the POWER ON indicator
depending on the brightness level of the viewing area. When
“Auto” is selected, the brightness of the indicator changes to
“High”, “Mid” or “Low” to match the brightness level of the
viewing area.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Language” (
Select a language (
/
/
).
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “Blue LED Dimmer” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Language
Menu
/
English
Select “Auto”, “High”, “Mid” or “Low” (
ENTER).
/
then
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Orbiter
This function automatically shifts the image little by little to
reduce the occurrence of the burning.
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “Orbiter” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
Select “On” (
/
then ENTER).
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
• To cancel this function, select “Off” in step 4.
Note
• When the Orbiter function is set to “On”, the image may appear
to drop slightly on the screen.
• This function does not operate when PC signals are received.
64
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
CEhnapjteor 1y2ing through External Equipment
Displaying a DVD image
To watch a DVD image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control unit
or press INPUT on the plasma display to select “INPUT 2”.
About External Equipment
You can connect many types of external equipment to your
plasma display, like a DVD player, VCR, personal computer,
game console, and camcorder.
To view images coming from external equipment, select the input
source using the INPUT 1 to INPUT 7 buttons on the remote
control or the INPUT button on the plasma display.
Note
• Refer to your DVD player instruction manual for the signal type.
• The INPUT 2 terminals are checked whether they are
connected in the following order; 1) Component Video, 2) S-
Video, 3) Video.
Caution
Use the desired connection for viewing.
• To protect all equipment, always unplug the plasma display
from the power outlet before connecting to a DVD player, VCR,
personal computer, game console, camcorder, or other
external equipment.
• Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be
actually used.
Watching a VCR image
Note
• Refer to the relevant instruction manual (DVD player, personal
computer, etc.) carefully before making connections.
Connecting a VCR
Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a VCR and other
audiovisual equipment.
Watching a DVD image
4
5
Connecting a DVD player
Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a DVD player and
other audiovisual equipment.
Rear view
S-Video cable
(commercially available)
4
5
AV cable
(commercially available)
Rear view
Component Video cable
(commercially available)
VCR
Displaying a VCR image
To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 1 on the remote control unit
or press INPUT on the plasma display to select “INPUT 1”.
AV cable
(commercially available)
Note
• The INPUT 1 terminals are checked whether they are
connected in the following order; 1) S-Video, 2) Video.
Use the desired connection for viewing.
DVD player
• Connect external equipment only to terminals that are actually
to be used.
65
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
Using HDMI Input
12
Connecting HDMI equipment
When using the INPUT 4 terminal:
The INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6, INPUT 7 terminals are HDMI
terminals to which digital video and audio signals can be input.
To use the HDMI terminal, specify the types of video and audio
signals to be received from the connected equipment. For the
types of these signals, see the operation manual that came with
the connected equipment.
Before starting the menu, press INPUT 4, INPUT 5, INPUT 6 or
INPUT 7 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the plasma
display to select “INPUT 4”, “INPUT 5”, “INPUT 6” or “INPUT 7”.
4
5
Rear view
Viewed from below of
the plasma display
5
4
Video signals supported
720 (1440) x [email protected] Hz/60 Hz
720 x [email protected] Hz/60 Hz
1280 x [email protected] Hz/60 Hz
1920 x [email protected] Hz/60 Hz
1920 x 1080p@24 Hz
HDMI compliant
cable (HDMI cable
having the HDMI
mark)
Audio cable
(commercially available)
Make this connection
when inputting analog
audio signals.
1920 x 1080p@60 Hz
PC signals supported
640 x 480 (VGA) 60 Hz
800 x 600 (SVGA) 60 Hz
1024 x 768 (XGA) 60 Hz
1360 x 768 (Wide - XGA) 60 Hz
1280 x 1024 (SXGA) 60 Hz
HDMI equipment
When using the INPUT 7 terminal:
4
5
For audio, the system supports the following:
• Linear PCM (STEREO 2ch)
• Sampling frequency: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Rear view
HDMI Control supported
The plasma display supports the HDMI Control functions. By
connecting devices that support the HDMI Control functions to
the plasma display, you can control the connected device(s) from
the plasma display or remote control unit of the plasma display.
See Using the HDMI Control on Chapter 13.
HDMI compliant
cable (HDMI cable
having the HDMI
mark)
Deep Color supported
Deep Color means the color depth that describes the number of
bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped
image. Besides the conventional RGB/YCbCr16 bit/20 bit/24 bit
signals, the plasma display also supports RGB/YCbCr30 bit/36 bit
signals. This enables finer, minute color reproduction when a
device that supports Deep Color signals (HDMI1.3) is connected
to the plasma display. When Deep Color signals are received, the
color depth appears on the channel display.
HDMI equipment
Note
• It may take a short while until the image is displayed,
depending on the equipment connected.
• When connecting a PC to the HDMI terminal, use the HDMI
compliant PC or video card.
• When connecting a PC to the HDMI terminal using a DVI
output terminal, the plasma display may not display properly. If
that is the case, consult with your PC manufacturer.
• PC picture and/or sound may not be displayed or heard
properly depending on the PC used.
66
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
To specify the type of input signals
Note
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
• If you select a parameter other than “Auto”, make such a
setting that results in natural color.
• If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type.
• For the digital video signal types to be specified, check the
operation manual that came with the connected equipment.
/
then ENTER).
Select “HDMI Input” (
Select “Signal Type” (
/
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Video” or “PC” (
/
To specify the type of audio signals
When you use the INPUT 4 or INPUT 5 HDMI terminal, select the
terminal for the desired input source, then perform the following
procedure to specify the type of audio signals.
Item
Description
Video (default) Select this option except when a PC is connected
PC
Select this option when a PC is connected to the
HDMI input terminal
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “HDMI Input” (
Select “Audio” (
/
then ENTER).
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
Caution
Select the type of audio signals (
/
then ENTER).
• Make sure to select “PC” when a PC is connected to the HDMI
input terminal.
• If you select “Auto”, an attempt will be made to identify the
type of audio signals when audio signals are received.
Note
Item
Auto (default)
Description
• In the “Video” mode, the image is “over-scanned” (enlarged),
and the mode is automatically switched to “PC” when PC
signals are received.
• In the “PC” mode, the image is displayed in full size for
optimum image quality.
Automatically identifies input audio signals
Accepts digital audio signals
Accepts analog audio signals
Digital
Analog
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• If no sound is output, specify another audio signal type.
• For the audio signal types to be specified, check the operation
manual that came with the connected equipment.
when “Video” is selected
(“overscan” size screen)
when “PC” is selected
(“underscan” size screen)
• Depending on the equipment to be connected, you also need
to connect analog audio cables.
To specify the type of digital video signals
1
2
3
4
5
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “HDMI Input” (
Select “Video” (
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
Select the type of digital video signals (
ENTER).
/
then
• If you select “Auto”, an attempt will be made to identify the
type of digital video signals when digital video signals are
received.
Item
Auto (default)
Description
Automatically identifies input digital video signals
Digital Component Video signals (4:2:2) locked
Digital Component Video signals (4:4:4) locked
Digital RGB signals (16 to 235) locked
Digital RGB signals (0 to 255) locked
Color-1
Color-2
Color-3
Color-4
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
67
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Enjoying a game console or watching
camcorder images
Connecting other audio equipment
The digital audio output terminal (optical) on this system can
output Dolby Digital signals. Using an optical digital cable,
connect an AV receiver to the digital audio output terminal
(optical) on the rear of the plasma display. This allows audio such
as digital TV broadcasting to be played in high quality.
Connecting a game console or camcorder
Use the INPUT 3 terminals to connect a game console,
camcorder and other audiovisual equipment.
If your AV receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal
(optical), you may connect the AUDIO OUT terminals (AUDIO) on
the rear of the plasma display to the audio input terminals on the
AV receiver. However, this method may result in audio delay
between the speakers and AUDIO, which may be reduced by
muting the speakers on the plasma display. Nonetheless, you
may experience delay between audio and video.
Plasma display (left side view)
Component Video cable
(commercially available)
AV cable
(commercially available)
Connecting an AV receiver
4
5
Rear view
4
5
Optical digital cable
(commercially available)
Camcorder/Game console
AV cable
(commercially
available)
This connection is
notrequiredwhen
connecting an AV
amp equipped
with the surround
function to a
Displaying an image of the game console or
camcorder
To watch an image coming from the game console or camcorder,
press INPUT 3 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the
plasma display to select “INPUT 3”.
subwoofer.
Note
• The INPUT 3 terminals are checked whether they are
connected in the following order; 1) Component Video, 2)
Video.
Subwoofer
AV receiver
Use the desired connection for viewing.
Note
• Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be
actually used.
• When using the digital audio output terminal (optical), you
need to make settings depending on your AV receiver. For more
information, see the instruction manual that came with the AV
receiver.
• For details, refer to the operation manual for the audio
equipment to be connected.
• Audio signals synchronized with currently displayed images
are always output to the AUDIO OUT terminals.
• The audio accompanying the images shown on the display are
always output to the SUBWOOFER output terminal.
• When signals are input from the HDMI terminals, no signals
are output from the DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• Input signals from the Home Media Gallery may cause audio
delays between the speakers and OPTICAL. Try muting the
speakers on the plasma display; however, you may still
experience delays between audio and video.
68
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Switching the optical audio signal type
Set up for the DIGITAL OUT terminal (OPTICAL), depending on
your AV receiver.
Displaying an image from a personal computer
When connected to a personal computer, the input signal type is
automatically identified. If the personal computer image does not
come in clearly, you may need to use Auto Setup. See page 61.
To watch an image coming from the personal computer, press PC
on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the plasma display
to select “PC”.
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “Digital Audio Out” (
Select “Dolby Digital” or “PCM” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
/
/
Note
Item
Description
• The PC terminals cannot be used for audio-visual equipment.
Dolby Digital
For Dolby Digital encoded signals, outputs in the
Dolby Digital format. For PCM encoded signals,
outputs in the PCM format.
Signal names for 15-pin mini D-sub connector
(default)
PCM
Always outputs in the PCM format regardless of the
types of signals
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
15
14
13
12
11
5
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Watching an image from a personal
computer
Pin No.
Signal name
1
R
2
G
Connecting a personal computer
Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer.
3
B
4
Not connected
Not connected
GND (ground)
GND (ground)
GND (ground)
+5 V
5
Note
6
• The PC input terminals are DDC2B-compatible.
• Plug & Play may not correctly function, depending on the
personal computer in use.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GND (ground)
Not connected
SDA
4
5
HD
Rear view
Viewed from below of
the plasma display
VD
SCL
Computer compatibility chart
Resolution
Frequency
70 Hz
RGB cable
(commercially
available)
720 x 400
640 x 480 (VGA)
800 x 600 (SVGA)
1280 x 720
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
AV cable with a mini plug
(commercially available)
(When PC audio is connected)
1024 x 768 (XGA)
1360 x 768 (Wide-XGA)
1280 x 1024 (SXGA)
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
Personal computer
69
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Plasma display
Connecting control cords
Connect control cords between the plasma display and other
4
5
Pioneer equipment having the
logo. You can then operate the
connected equipment by sending commands from its remote
control unit to the remote control sensor on the plasma display.
Rear view
After the CONTROL IN terminals have been connected, the
remote control sensors on the connected equipment do not
accept commands from the remote control units. Face the
remote control units to the remote control sensor on the plasma
display when operating the connected equipment.
Note
• Make sure that the power is turned off when making
connections.
• Complete all component connections before making control
cord connections.
About SR+
The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the plasma display
supports SR+, which allows linked operations with a Pioneer AV
receiver. SR+ presents functions such as the input switch linkage
operation function and the DSP surround mode display function.
For more information, see the instruction manual that came with
the Pioneer AV receiver supporting SR+.
a
b
CONTROL
IN
OUT
Note
• When making control cord connections, use the SR+ cable.
• When making control cord connections with one or more
pieces of Pioneer equipment, directly connect the plasma
display and the Pioneer amplifier that supports SR+. Do not
connect other equipment between them.
CONTROL
IN
• When the connected equipment is being operated using SR+,
the volume on the plasma display is temporarily reduced.
OUT
IR REPEATER OUT
Connect control cords between the plasma display and other
Pioneer equipment. You can then operate the connected
equipment by sending commands from its remote control unit to
the remote control sensor on the plasma display. This function is
convenient when controlling Pioneer equipment from other
Pioneer equipment.
c
CONTROL
IN
OUT
When SR+ is not used (
a,
b
, and c):
The control cables (commercially
available) are mono sound cables with
mini plugs (no resistance).
When SR+ is used (
a):
Use the SR+ cable (available as option).
70
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery
12
Supported file formats
The table below shows supported file formats that can be played
back or displayed on the plasma display. These formats are
applicable to network sources. Most of them are also applicable
to USB sources. However, media server content protected by
digital rights management, such as WMDRM10 (Windows Media
Digital Rights Management 10), may not play on the plasma
display.
With Home Media Gallery, you can enjoy digital content such as
movies, music and photo files. Playable content is files stored on
one or more media servers connected by a home network (LAN)
or those stored on a USB flash drive. After connecting via a
broadband router or an Ethernet hub to a media server with
network software*, you can navigate through the digital content
on the Home Media Gallery. For USB interface, the plasma
display supports Mass Storage Class devices.
Type of files Format
Movie
MPEG PS (mpg, mpeg, mpe, m2p), MPEG-2 TS, WMV
(asf, wmv), MPEG4 (mp4)
* Referred to as a “media server” that contains digital content such
as movies, music and photo files. PCs that have pre-installed
media server software and recorders with a media server function
are considered the media server. There are some media servers
that you can choose from; for example, Windows Media Connect,
Windows Media Player that has a media sharing function, and
DLNA compliant servers.
Music
Photo
MP3 (mp3), LPCM, WAV (wav), WMA (asf, wma)
JPEG (jpg, jpeg), BMP (bmp), PNG (png), TIFF (tif, tiff),
GIF (gif)
• Some formats may not be supported nor displayed on Home
Media Gallery as formats that individual media servers support
vary. Refer to the manufacturer’s or other relevant website for
supported formats on your media server.
• Even with the format included in the above table, some
functions may not operate properly depending on the content.
Usable free media servers
Free media servers available from Microsoft include:
1. Windows Media Connect 2.0
Windows Media Connect runs on a 32-bit PC with Windows
XP Service Pack 2 (SP2) installed. When it is already installed,
you can enjoy Home Media Gallery using your PC.
• Even with the format included in the above table, some files
may not be played properly through a USB device.
Note
2. Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP
• Content may not play or display properly depending on the
conditions of use.
• Sources for this panel include media servers running on the
LAN network, or SD Card, MS, MMC, xD Picture and CF that
comply with the Mass Storage File System through a USB
interface.
Windows Media Player 11 features Media Sharing that runs
on a 32-bit PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2)
installed. If Windows Media Connect 2.0 is not installed in
your PC, you can download Windows Media Player 11 from
Microsoft’s website.
3. Windows Media Player 11 for Windows Vista
Windows Media Player 11 will be featured in 32-bit Windows
• Home Media Gallery complies with DLNA version 1.0 and
PlaysForSure version 1.21. If your media server supports
different DLNA and/or PlaysForSure version(s), some Home
Media Gallery function(s) and content format(s) may not be
supported.
• Supported formats and contents are subject to change. Visit
the Pioneer website for updated information:
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
• The Home Media Gallery functions as a WMDRM10-ND
(Microsoft Windows Media DRM for networked devices).
Content can only be navigated from the media servers that
support WMDRM10-ND.
• The system may not be able to display content from
incompatible memory cards.
Vista PCs.
When selecting the most suitable media server, please visit
Microsoft’s website for system requirements, known issues,
installation procedures and other updated information.
PlaysForSure
PlaysForSure is a marketing certification given by Microsoft. The
PlaysForSure logo makes it easy to find digital media stores and
devices that work together. Digital media purchased from online
stores carrying the PlaysForSure logo is available for use on this unit.
This unit complies with PlaysForSure Requirements
Specification for Network Devices Version 1.21.
The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
USA and other countries.
• You cannot use the Home Media Gallery until dimmed
elements on the menu screen turn white.
DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio/Video/Image Player
• Some Home Media Gallery functions, such as trick play during
Fast Forward and Rewind, Time Search and Search, may not
work depending on the media server’s capability and
functionality.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry
organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and
mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers
with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless
network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that
comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines. This unit
complies with the DLNA Home Networked Device
Interoperability Guidelines v1.0.
When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA-
compatible device is connected to this player, some setting
changes of software or other devices may be required. Please
refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for
more information.
Digital Audio Output terminal (Optical)
Note
• When using the optical output terminal for networked audio or
video:
If the plasma display and audio system are in the same room,
you may experience an audio delay between the plasma
speakers and the audio system. Try muting the speakers on the
plasma display to correct this delay. However, this action may
cause delays between audio and video.
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks
of Digital Living Network Alliance.
71
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Confirming the IP Address
Making network connections
After making the network connection, follow the instructions
below to confirm the panel’s IP Address before accessing the
network. (The setup is effective for “Auto” only. To perform the
procedure, DHCP on your server or router must be valid.)
To connect to a network, set up the Home Media Gallery through
the panel’s menu. Connect to a home network (LAN) via an
Ethernet hub or cable directly to a media server.
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
Note
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
• Although the Home Media Gallery supports 10BASE-T, it is
better to use 100BASE-TX for improved display quality and
speed.
2
3
4
Select “Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
then ENTER).
Select “Network Setup” (
/
Connecting via an Ethernet hub
Select “Automatically acquire IP” (
ENTER).
/
/
/
then
If you already operate one or more media servers on a local area
network (LAN), connect the plasma display to the Ethernet (LAN)
hub using a standard (“straight-through”) Ethernet (LAN) cable.
See the diagram below.
• The screen turns from “Select” mode to “Input” mode.
Select “Yes” ( then ENTER).
5
/
• The IP Address is automatically assigned.
4
5
• The Home Media Gallery supports Auto IP and DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If the system
failed to acquire the IP Address or if you want to obtain
different addresses, select “No” then enter “IP Address”
Rear view
and “Subnet mask”. Use the 0 to 9 and
/
/
/
buttons
Media Server 2
to enter an address, then press ENTER. You do not need to
enter “Default Gateway” and “DNS Server”.
6
7
Select “OK” (
/
then ENTER).
Ethernet Hub
(Router with hub function)
• The “Reset” dialog appears on screen.
Viewed from the
bottom of the
plasma display
Select “OK” and press ENTER.
• The home network module restarts.
• A message “Setting up Home Media Gallery. Please wait
until initialized.” appears on screen.
• When the initialization is finished, setting values become
effective and the top menu of the Home Media Gallery
returns.
Straight-through
Cable
Note
Media Server 1
• For information on DHCP, refer to network device’s operating
instructions.
• You may need to contact your service provider or network
administrator when manually entering an IP Address.
• Some media servers block or are programmed to block access
to client servers. When connecting the plasma display, check
the media server for client server access rights.
Connecting directly to a Media Server
To run a PC as a media server, connect the plasma display
directly to the PC using a twisted (“cross-over”) Ethernet (LAN)
cable. See the diagram below.
4
5
Connecting a USB device
Rear view
You can also enjoy content stored on memory cards by
connecting a USB device to the plasma display. When you insert
a USB flash drive or multi-card reader into the USB port, the root
directory or the Device List screen appears. In addition, you can
connect your digital camera directly to the plasma display using
a USB connector cable.
Viewed from the
bottom of the
plasma display
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
2
Select “USB” (
/
then ENTER).
Cross-over Cable
• The Device List is displayed on screen with the selected
device highlighted if you have not checked in the “Single
Server/USB” box after selecting “Setup” and then “Auto
Connection Setup”. If you have checked in the box, the list
is skipped.
Media Server 1
72
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Removing a USB device
To remove a USB device, exit the Home Media Gallery first and
then disconnect the device.
3
4
Select the desired device (
/
then ENTER).
• You can select a device only when the Device List is
displayed.
Press ENTER to navigate to a folder or play a file/
content.
Note
• Be sure to exit the Home Media Gallery screen before removing
the USB device. If you remove the USB device while the Home
Media Gallery screen is displayed, data inside the memory may
be damaged.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Note
• If the Home Media Gallery is launched and the “Single Server/
USB” box is checked after selecting “Setup” and then “Auto
Connection Setup”, the system displays the root directory
immediately after inserting a USB device. In this case, you can
start from step 4. When a multi-card reader is inserted, the
Device List appears with the selected device highlighted. In
this case, you can start from step 3.
• Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately after the
system is switched On or Off. This action may cause data
inside the memory to be damaged.
• Pioneer is not liable for any loss or damage to the data inside
the USB flash drive.
Starting the Home Media Gallery function
Plasma display
1
2
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
USB flash drive
Select “Media Navigator”, “USB”, “My Playlist” or
“Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To exit Home Media Gallery, press HOME MENU or HOME
MEDIA GALLERY.
Home Media Gallery
Digital Camera with USB
Mass Storage Class
Media Navigator
Server
XXXXXX
USB
My Playlist
Setup
1
Flash media via USB adapter (Multi-card Reader )
Navigating the files and folders
By selecting Media Navigator, the previously selected server
menu is automatically displayed on the screen by default (page
86). When only one server is found, the system automatically
connects the server. You can also use the Tool Menu to switch to
another server or manually select a server from the Server List.
The display is automatically changed to a server list if there are
no previously navigated servers.
Readable USB devices
This system reads FAT16, FAT32, NTFS, ISO9660, Joliet or UDF.
Readable data files
Movie, music and photo files can also be played with the
exception of Digital Rights Management (WMDRM10) protected
files.
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
Note
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
• A single USB device can be connected at a time and no USB
hub connected.
• This system may not be able to display modified or edited
content from a PC or other equipment.
2
Select “Media Navigator” (
/
then ENTER).
• A server menu appears. The file/folder configuration may
vary depending on the server selected.
• After selecting a category, folder or container and
navigating on subsequent screens, you can find a file and
start the appropriate Player depending on the selected file.
• This system supports the USB Mass Storage Class.
• Some digital cameras may require a setup procedure for Mass
Storage Class data transfer. The setup is done on the camera.
See the operating instructions supplied with the digital
camera.
• This system may not be able to display images, depending on
the type of your memory card, or camera.
3
4
Select the desired folder to navigate or file/content to
play (
/
or
/
then ENTER).
Press ENTER to display a subsequent screen.
• Subsequent screen(s) appears.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To exit Home Media Gallery, press HOME MENU or HOME
MEDIA GALLERY.
73
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Selectable screen display
Screen on which Tool
Menu is available
Menu items
Function
Menu display options are: “List”, “Thumbnail” or “Thumbnail
List”. Press D then select “Change view” from the Tool Menu to
choose from the screen display options.
List screen
Slide Show Setup Used to set up a slide-
Server List/Media
Navigator/USB/My
Playlist/Playlist List
(Movie/Music/Photo)/
Folder Contents List/
Contents List/Photo
Player
show on the Photo
Player
All Photos
XXXX
Title
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Album
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Date
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
2006/11/19
Server
XXXXXX
1/27
Add to My
Adds the selected files
to My Playlist
Media Navigator/Folder
Contents List/Contents
List/Movie Player/Music
Player/Photo Player
1
Tool
D
*1
Playlist
Thumbnail screen
Select Server
Moves to the Server List Media Navigator/Folder
All Photos
XXXX
screen
Contents List/Contents
List
All Photos
Add to My Playlist
Change view
Sort
Til
X
All
X
Da
2
Se
X
List
Title
XXXX
Thumbnail
Thunbnail List
XXXX
Album
XXXX
*2
Search
Stops playback of a
music file
Media Navigator/ Playlist
List (Movie/ Music/
Photo)/Folder Contents
List/Contents List/Music
Player/Photo Player
Stop Music
Slide Show Settings
Detailed Display
Select Searver
Stop Music
Date
XXXX
2006/11/19
Server
XXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX
1/27
1/27
1
Tool
D
1
Tool
D
Change Name
Change view
Used to change content Playlist List (Movie/
Thumbnail List screen
names in My Playlist
Music/Photo)
All Photos
XXXX
Switches the screen
display to List,
Folder Contents List/
Contents List
Title
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Album
XXXX
Date
Thumbnail, or
Thumbnail List
2006/11/19
Server
XXXXXX
XXXX
1/27
1
Tool
D
Time Search
Slow Playback
BGM Setup
Starts playback at the
preset time on the Movie Player
or Music Player screen
Movie Player/Music
Plays back in the slow
mode on the Movie or
Music screen
Movie Player
Using the Tool Menu
Press D on the remote control to access the pop-up Tool Menu.
Various play and display modes can be selected from the Tool
Menu. The selectable menu items differ depending on the
submenu (see the table below).
Used to set up the
slideshow BGM on the
Photo Player
Photo Player
Screen on which Tool
Menu is available
Move
Moves the order of
content in My Playlist
Contents List (Playlist)
Contents List (Playlist)
Menu items
Function
Update to Latest
Information
Updates the server
connection status
Server List (connected/
not connected)
Delete from My
Deletes the selected
content from My Playlist
*1
Playlist
Delete Server
USB Devices List
Consecutive
Deletes the server(s)
that are dimmed on the connected)
list
Server List (server not
1
*
*
When a file is selected
While music is played
2
Moves to the USB
Devices List screen
Folder Contents List
(USB)/Contents List
(USB)
Continuously plays video Media Navigator/Folder
content starting from the Contents List/Contents
selected item
*1
Playback
List
*1
Displays the detailed
information on the
selected content
Media Navigator/Folder
Contents List/Contents
List
Detailed Display
Sort
Sorts items in Folder or Media Navigator/Folder
Contents List
Contents List/Contents
List
Search
Searches the desired
items in Folder or
Contents List by word
Media Navigator/Folder
Contents List/Contents
List
74
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
4
5
Select the desired content (
/
or
/
then ENTER).
Media Navigator
• The menu can be displayed as a “List”, “Thumbnail” or
“Thumbnail List” screen. Press D then select “Change
view” from the Tool Menu (
While navigating through the folders a media server provides,
you can select the desired file to start the corresponding player
by pressing ENTER.
/
then ENTER).
Press ENTER to play or display.
Screen Components
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To exit Home Media Gallery, press HOME MENU or HOME
MEDIA GALLERY.
1
3
Enjoying movie files
Media Navigator
Movie
4
You can display the menu as a “List”, “Thumbnail” or “Thumbnail
List” screen. Press D then select an option under “Change view”
on the Tool Menu. You can also navigate through the subsequent
or preceding menu levels in the server or USB device by
Title
Movie
Music
Photos
User Files
Server
XXXXXX
5
6
pressing
/
/
/
/ENTER. When you select movie content
1/4
from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen, the Movie
Player automatically launches. Select a category, folder, or
device to access the submenu containing the required file or
content.
1
Tool
D
2
7
The Movie Player screen appears when you select a movie file
from My Playlist, just like selecting a file in the server.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Thumbnail of the file selected (if obtained)
Name of the server currently selected
Current menu level
Item being selected (highlighted in yellow)
File number/total number of files
Number of servers connected
Key guide
Screen Components
1 2
3
4
XXXX
2006/11/30 00:00:59
XXXX
5
Note
• The Media Navigator is not launched depending on the option
selected in Auto Connection Setup (page 86). The screen
displays after selecting a server in the server list.
10
12
Playback
A-B
LR A-B
RDM
00 : 00 : 45
A
Repeat
Random
Tool
B
C
D
USB
Like navigating through the media servers, you can select the
desired file contained in the device selected on the USB Devices
List screen to start the corresponding player by pressing ENTER.
You can also select the menu displayed on either “List”,
“Thumbnail” or “Thumbnail List” screen. Press D and select
“Change view” from the Tool Menu.
7
6
8
9
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Movie icon
Title (Category or Folder name)
Date
Album name
Play time
Key guide
Progress bar
Audio mode icon
Note
• The USB Devices List screen may not be displayed depending
on the option selected in “Auto Connection Setup”. “Single
Server/USB” is selected for “Auto Connection Setup” by
default. You don’t need to select a device in the USB Devices
List when you use a single directory device (USB flash drive).
10 A-B repeat mode icon
11 Repeat mode icon
12 Random mode icon (appears when the mode is valid)
My Playlist
Each category (Movie, Music and Photo) has five different
Playlists in which you can register up to 100 files each. The My
Playlist option can contain sound and image files selected in the
“Media Navigator”. To edit a Playlist, use the Tool Menu (page 74).
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
2
3
Select “My Playlist” (
Select a Playlist list from “Movie Playlist”, “Music
Playlist” or “Photo Playlist” ( then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
/
75
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Movie Player key guide
Play modes
ENTER:
Pauses while playback or plays back while in PAUSE
Time Search
(Tool Menu)
Plays back the selected content
from the time preset on the Movie
Player
Fast reverse during playback or when in PAUSE. Each
press toggles the reverse speed between x 2, x 4, x 8,
x 20, x 50, and x 100 or the slow mode speed between
x 1/2, x 1/4, x 1/8, and x 1/16. When the beginning of the
content is reached, it pauses.
:
Slow
Playback
(Tool Menu)
(Tool Menu)
Plays back the content in slow
mode on the Movie Player
Add to My
Playlist
Adds the selected content to My
Playlist List
Fast forward while playback or PAUSE. Each press
toggles the forward speed between x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20,
x 50, and x 100 or the slow mode speed between x 1/16,
x 1/8, x 1/4, and x 1/2. When the end of the content is
reached, it pauses.
:
Stop Movie
Player
(STOP),
RETURN
Stops the Movie Player
Fast Forward/
Fast Reverse
See the key guide table
/
,
Skips 15 seconds backward and plays back or pauses
while in PAUSE
:
:
/
Forward/
Reverse
(15 sec.)
See the key guide table
/
Skips 15 seconds forward and plays back or pauses
while in PAUSE
(PLAY):
(PAUSE):
(STOP):
Plays back the content
Pauses the playback
Play
ENTER,
(PLAY)
See the key guide table
See the key guide table
A-B Repeat
Mode
A (BLUE)
Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen
(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)
Repeat Mode
B (RED)
See the key guide table
See the key guide table
(FF):
Same as
mode)
(only fast forward function while in the slow
Random
Mode
C (GREEN)
(RWD):
A (BLUE):
Same as
mode)
(only fast reverse function while in the slow
(Tool Menu)
D (YELLOW) See the key guide table
Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired point A to start
and B to end during playback. To cancel the mode,
press A (BLUE) on the remote control.
Note
• Some functions may not be supported depending on the server
type or version used.
• During playback, an error may arise in time-related information
depending on the content or server software.
• Some functions may not be supported depending on the
content.
B (RED):
Every press toggles the repeat mode between “No
Repeat” and “Repeat Once” or between “No Repeat”,
“Repeat Once” and “Repeat All” while in Playlist
C (GREEN):
D (YELLOW):
Available only in Playlist or “Consecutive Playback”
mode. Every press toggles the random mode between
“Random Off” and “Random On”.
Switches the Tool Menu display on and off. Even if the
Tool Menu is displayed while content is played back, a
movie is kept playing but the time counter and progress
bar do not function.
Time Search
1
In playback mode or PAUSE, press D then select “Time
Search” from the Tool Menu ( then ENTER).
/
• A “Time Search” dialog screen appears.
INFO:
Displays the Player status at the bottom of the screen
while a movie is played back. Another press of the key
displays a key guide, as well. Pressing the key once
more cancels all the information display.
2
Select “Hour” and/or “Minute” for “Input Time” (
then ENTER).
/
• Enter the desired time using buttons 0 to 9.
MTS:
Every press of the key toggles the audio mode between
“L + R”, “L” and “R”
Time Search
RETURN:
Same function as STOP
Adjusts the sound volume
Mutes the sound
Input Time
VOL+, VOL-:
MUTING:
H
Min
1
OK
Cancel
HOME MENU: Quits Home Media Gallery and returns to the last entry
screen.
3
4
Press ENTER after the entry is complete.
Select “OK” ( then ENTER).
• The movie begins playing from the time you set.
HOME MEDIA Quits Home Media Gallery and returns to the last entry
GALLERY:
screen.
/
• To cancel the Time Search, select “Cancel” and press
ENTER.
76
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Fast Forward/Fast Reverse
Note
1
While playing content, press and hold for Fast
Reverse or press and hold for Fast Forward.
• This function may not be supported depending on the content
or server software.
• An error may arise in time-related information depending on
the content or server software.
• Only “Cancel” can be selected when you have entered a time
exceeding the content’s time range.
Forward/Reverse (15 sec.)
While playing content, press and hold
1
or
backward or forward in 15-second increments.
to jump
Slow Playback
A-B Repeat Mode
1
In playback mode or PAUSE, press D then select “Slow
Playback” from the Tool Menu.
1
While playing content, press A where you want repeat
to start.
2
Press ENTER.
2
Press A again where you want repeat to end.
• Slow playback begins.
• The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B mode
icon changes.
• The selected movie scenes are repeatedly played back.
• You can change the playback speed by pressing
while in the slow mode.
/
• To discontinue slow playback, press ENTER or PLAY. The
system returns to the normal playback mode.
• To return to normal mode, press A again while in the
A-B repeat mode.
Note
Note
• This function may not be supported depending on the content.
• The A-B repeat function is only available during playback in
normal mode.
• If the screen display doesn’t match the player status, a
malfunction may have occurred. Stop playback, then try the
operation again.
Add to My Playlist
1
While navigating or playing, select the file to be added
to My Playlist ( then ENTER).
Press D then select “Add to My Playlist” from the Tool
Menu ( then ENTER).
• A “Playlist Selection” dialog screen appears.
Select a Playlist ( then ENTER).
/
/
/
Repeat Mode
2
/
1
While playing content in the Media Navigator or USB
device, press B to select “Repeat Once”.
• The title being played is repeated.
3
/
• A check mark is provided beside the selected Playlist.
2
Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (“Repeat Off” is
selected).
• When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER, the
mark jumps to the new Playlist from the previously
selected one.
• After playing the currently selected title, the Player stops.
Note
Playlist Selection
• When playing content in the Playlist, you can select from
“Repeat Off”, “Repeat All” (plays all items in the Playlist
repeatedly) or “Repeat Once” (plays the content being watched
repeatedly).
Select a Playlist to register
Playlist1
Playlist2
Playlist3
Playlist4
Playlist5
20
0
0
0
0
Random Mode
1
While playing content in the Playlist, press C to select
“Random On”.
OK
Cancel
• Random Repeat playback starts.
4
Select “OK” (
/
then ENTER).
2
Press C again to cancel the random mode (“Random Off”
is selected).
• The file is added to the selected Playlist.
• To cancel the operation, select “Cancel” then press
ENTER.
Note
• The Random Repeat mode is only available for content in the
Playlist, or in “Consecutive Playback” mode.
77
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Music Player key guide
Enjoying music files
Moves up a cursor to a title above
You can display the menu as a “List”, “Thumbnail” or “Thumbnail
List” screen. Press D then select an option under “Change view”
on the Tool Menu. You can also navigate through the subsequent
or preceding menu levels in the server or USB device by pressing
:
Moves down a cursor to a title below
:
ENTER:
Plays back the selected music content. Pauses the
music content being played if it is highlighted in the
Playlist screen or plays the selected music content if
/
/
/
/ENTER.
When you select music content from the server menu on the
Media Navigator screen, the Music Player automatically
launches. Select a category, folder, or device to access the
submenu containing the required file or content. The Music
Player screen appears when you select a music file from My
Playlist, just like selecting a file in the server.
different content is highlighted by pressing
/
.
Fast reverse during playback or when in PAUSE. Each
press toggles the reverse speed between x 2, x 4, x 8,
x 20, x 50, and x 100. When the beginning of the content
is reached, it pauses.
:
:
Fast forward during playback or when in PAUSE. Each
press toggles the forward speed between x 2, x 4, x 8,
x 20, x 50, and x 100. When the end of the content is
reached, it pauses.
Note
• The Music Player only displays a “List” screen.
Screen Components
RETURN:
Returns to the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/
Thumbnail List). Content being played does not stop.
1
3
4
(PLAY):
Plays back the selected content. Pauses while in
playback and plays while in PAUSE.
All Music
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
(PAUSE):
Pauses the playback
XXXX
XXXX
2
6
(STOP):
Stops the Player and does not return to the previous
screen (Selecting the “Stop Music” from the Tool Menu
also stops the Player.)
XXXX
5
00:01:00
Other
2/20
A-B
(FF):
Same as
Same as
Playback
A-B
RDM
00 : 00 : 14
13
A
B
Repeat
Random
Tool
C
D
(RWD):
A (BLUE):
9
7
8
10
11 12
Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired point A to start
and B to end during playback. To cancel the mode,
press A (BLUE) on the remote control.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Title (Category or Folder name)
Jacket image (Music icon)
Playing Music icon
Contents list
B (RED):
Every press toggles the repeat mode between “No
Repeat”, “Repeat Once” and “Repeat All”
C (GREEN):
D (YELLOW):
Every press toggles the random mode between
“Random Off” and “Random On”
Number of items
Detailed display
Play status
Time counter
Key guide
Displays the Tool Menu. Even if the Tool Menu is
displayed while content is played back, music is kept
playing but the time counter and progress bar do not
function.
10 Progress bar
PAGE+, PAGE-: Available only when there are one or more pages in the
11 A-B repeat mode icon
12 Repeat mode icon
13 Random mode icon
content. Change the pages back and forth.
VOL+, VOL-:
MUTING:
Adjusts the sound volume
Mutes the sound
HOME MENU: Quits Home Media Gallery and returns to the last entry
screen
HOME MEDIA Quits Home Media Gallery and returns to the last entry
GALLERY:
screen.
Note
• Files may not be played back properly depending on the
content.
78
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Random Mode
Play modes
1
While playing content in the Playlist, press C to select
“Random On”.
Add to My Playlist
(Tool Menu)
(Tool Menu)
Adds the selected content to My
Playlist List
• Random Repeat playback starts.
Time Search
Plays back the selected content
from the time preset on the Music
Player
2
Press C again to cancel the random mode (“Random Off”
is selected).
Stop Music
(Tool Menu), Stops the Music Player
(STOP)
Enjoying photo files
Fast Forward/
Fast Reverse
See the key guide table
/
,
You can display the menu as a “List”, “Thumbnail” or “Thumbnail
List” screen. Press D then select an option under “Change view”
on the Tool Menu. You can also navigate through the subsequent
or preceding menu levels in the server or USB device by pressing
/
Moves Up/Down
a cursor
See the key guide table
See the key guide table
See the key guide table
/
/
/
/
/ENTER.
Play
ENTER,
When you select photo content from the server menu on the
Media Navigator screen, the Photo Player automatically
launches. The selected content is displayed in full screen by
pressing ENTER. Select a category, folder or device to access the
submenu containing the required file or content.
Pressing ENTER again allows a slideshow to begin. After a
slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between “PLAY”
and “PAUSE”. Instead of pressing ENTER twice, you can press
PLAY to start the slideshow immediately.
A-B Repeat
Mode
A (BLUE)
Repeat Mode
B (RED)
See the key guide table
See the key guide table
Random
Mode
C (GREEN)
(Tool Menu)
D (YELLOW) See the key guide table
• Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as for
the Movie Player.
The Photo Player screen appears when you select a photo file
from My Playlist, just like selecting a file in the server.
• Refer to page 74 for the color button D (Tool Menu).
Screen Components
Note
1 2
3
• Some functions may not be supported depending on the server
type or version used.
• Playback continues even when you move from the Player
screen to the previously selected screen by pressing RETURN.
XXXX
2006/11/30
XXXX
4
A-B Repeat Mode
1
While playing content, press A where you want repeat
to start.
9
10
Playback
RDM
6
/
27
B
Repeat
C
Random
D
Tool
2
Press A again where you want repeat to end.
• The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B
repeat mode icon changes.
6
7
5
8
• The selected part of the title is repeatedly played back.
• To return to normal mode, press A again while in the A-B
repeat mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Photo icon
Title (Category or Folder name)
Album name
Date
Number of items
Play status
Key guide
Progress bar
Repeat mode icon
Note
• The A-B repeat function is only available during playback in
normal mode.
Repeat Mode
1
2
3
While playing content in the Media Navigator, USB
device or Playlist, press B to select “Repeat All”.
10 Random mode icon
• All titles in the folder or Playlist are played repeatedly.
Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (“Repeat Once”
is selected).
• The title being played is repeated.
Press B once more to cancel the repeat mode (“Repeat
Off” is selected).
• After playing the currently selected title, the Player stops.
79
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
• Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as for
the Movie Player.
• Refer to page 74 for the color button D (Tool Menu).
Photo Player key guide
ENTER:
Starts displaying a photo or playing a slideshow. Pauses
while playback or plays back while in PAUSE.
RETURN:
Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen
(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)
Note
• Some functions may not be supported depending on the server
type or version used.
• In rare cases, the image on the screen may appear jagged
when photo content is selected directly from a USB device. If
this is the case, the problem may be solved by viewing the
photo content through the network after having transferred it
to the server PC.
Displays the previous image content
Display the next image content
,
,
:
:
(PLAY):
(PAUSE):
(STOP):
Plays a slideshow
Pauses the slideshow
Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen
(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)
• Even with the supported format, files may not be played
properly depending on the content.
(FF):
Rotates the image 90º clockwise. Each press toggles
the rotation angle by 90º between 90º, 180º, 270º and 0º.
(RWD):
Rotates the image 90º counter-clockwise. Each press
toggles the rotation angle by 90º between 270º, 180º,
90º, and 0º.
Setting up the slideshow
You can enjoy a slideshow with music in the background. To
activate this feature, you must register music content in My
Playlist List beforehand (see My Playlist on page 75 and Setting
up BGM for the slideshow).
A (BLUE):
B (RED):
Rotates the image 90º clockwise. Each press toggles
the rotation angle by 90º between 90º, 180º, 270º and 0º.
Every press toggles the repeat mode between “No
Repeat” and “Repeat All”
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
C (GREEN):
D (YELLOW):
Every press toggles the random mode between
“Random Off” and “Random On”
2
3
Select “Media Navigator” (
Press D.
/
then ENTER).
Displays the Tool Menu. If the Tool Menu is displayed
while a slideshow is played, the slideshow and BGM are
paused.
• A pop-up screen of the Tool Menu appears.
Select “Slide Show Setup” ( then ENTER).
Select the desired setup item ( then ENTER).
4
5
6
/
INFO:
Displays the Player status at the bottom of the screen
while image content is played. Another press of the key
displays a key guide, as well. No Player information is
displayed when an image is shown in full screen (no
slideshow has been started). Other information may
display. Pressing the key once more cancels all the
information display.
/
Enter the setting in the “Effect” or “Interval” box (
then ENTER).
/
• Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter another setup.
VOL+, VOL-:
MUTING:
Adjusts the sound volume
Mutes the sound
Slide Show Setup
HOME MENU: Quits Home Media Gallery and returns to the last entry
Effect
Auto
screen.
Interval
3 seconds
HOME MEDIA Quits Home Media Gallery and returns to the last entry
GALLERY:
screen.
OK
Cancel
Play modes
BGM Setup
(Tool Menu) Sets up BGM
7
Select “OK” (
/
then ENTER).
Slide Show
Setup
(Tool Menu) Allows various slideshow setups
on the Photo player
• The slideshow setup finishes.
Add to My
Playlist
(Tool Menu) Adds the selected content to My
Playlist List
Note
• After setting the “Interval” time, it may take longer than the
preset time as the “Interval” time means the time up until the
Home Media Gallery starts obtaining the next image. Key
operations may not work while obtaining the next image.
Stop Photo
Player
(STOP),
RETURN
Stops the Photo Player
See the key guide table
See the key guide table
See the key guide table
Move File Forward/
Backward
(
/
/
/
)
Setting up BGM for the slideshow
Slideshow
ENTER,
(PLAY)
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
Rotate
A (BLUE),
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
/
2
Select photo content in the Media Navigator, USB
Repeat Mode
B (RED)
See the key guide table
See the key guide table
device or My Playlist (
/
/
/
then ENTER).
Random
Mode
C (GREEN)
• The Photo Player launches and photo content is displayed
in full screen.
(Tool Menu)
D (YELLOW) See the key guide table
80
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
3
4
Press D then select “BGM Setup” from the Tool Menu
5
6
Press ENTER or (Pause) to stop the slideshow.
(
/
then ENTER).
• The Photo Player goes into “PAUSE”.
• A “BGM Setup” dialog screen appears.
Press ENTER again to resume the slideshow.
Select a Playlist from the list as BGM (
/
then ENTER).
• To cancel the slideshow and stop the Photo Player, press
RETURN or (Stop) during the playback. The previous
screen returns.
• A check mark is provided beside the selected Playlist.
• When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER, the
mark jumps to the new Playlist from the previously
selected one.
Note
• When you press
displayed, the Photo Player goes into “PAUSE”.
/
/
/
, / while photo content is
BGM Setup
Playlist1
Playlist2
Playlist3
Playlist4
Playlist5
20
0
0
0
0
Rotating the image
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
BGM ON
2
Select photo content in the Media Navigator, USB
OK
Cancel
device or My Playlist (
/
/
/
then ENTER).
• The photo content is displayed in full screen.
• To stop the slideshow, press ENTER again.
5
6
Select “BGM ON”, “BGM ON (Random)” or “BGM OFF”
from the BGM status box ( then ENTER).
Select “OK” ( then ENTER).
/
3
4
Press ENTER or (Play) to start a slideshow.
/
• The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder
automatically display one by one.
• To display a key guide, press INFO.
Starting the slideshow
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
While using Photo Player, press A to rotate a photo.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
• The displayed image rotates by one quarter clockwise.
Each time A is pressed, the image rotates; 90º, 180º, 270º
and “Rotate Off”.
• The Photo Player goes into “PAUSE” (the slideshow is in
Stop mode).
2
Select a folder containing photo content (
ENTER).
/
then
• The Thumbnail screen is displayed (Thumbnail List or List
screen is displayed depending on the setting).
5
Press ENTER again to resume the slideshow.
3
Select the desired photo file from the Thumbnail screen
• The selected rotation mode is only effective for the image
being displayed. The default setting (“Rotate Off”) returns
when you move and display content on a different screen.
(
/
/
/
then ENTER).
• The photo content is displayed in full screen.
• You can start a slideshow by pressing (Play) on the
Thumbnail screen.
Repeating the slideshow
1
While playing a slideshow, press B to select “Repeat
Once”.
All Photos
• The slideshow being played is repeated.
Title
XXXX
Album
XXXX
2
Press B again to cancel the repeat mode (“Repeat Off” is
selected).
Date
2006/11/19
Server
XXXXXX
• After playing the currently selected slideshow, the Player
stops.
1/27
1
Tool
D
Playing the slideshow at random
4
Press ENTER or (Play) to start a slideshow.
1
While playing a slideshow, press C to select “Random
On”.
• The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder
automatically display one by one. See “Setting up the
slideshow” (page 80) for setting up the interval time.
• To display a key guide, press INFO.
• To display the next image content manually, press
.
• Random Repeat playback starts.
2
Press C again to cancel the random mode (“Random Off”
is selected).
or
• To display the previous image content manually, press
or
.
81
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Sort
Other useful functions
Search
You can search the desired items contained in the Folder or
Contents List by word. Searched results are displayed on the
screen.
You can sort the items contained in the Folder or Contents List.
1
2
3
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
Select the desired folder and/or content in the Media
Navigator (
/
/
/
then ENTER).
1
2
3
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
Press D then select “Sort” from the Tool Menu (
then ENTER).
/
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
Select the desired folder and/or content in the Media
• A “Sort” dialog screen appears.
Navigator (
/
/
/
then ENTER).
4
Select “Bottom-Up” or “Top-Down” in the “Sort Order”
box (
Press D then select “Search” from the Tool Menu (
then ENTER).
/
/
then ENTER).
• A “Search” dialog screen appears.
XXXX
4
Select the “Contains the following” box in “Set the
Sort
Title
XXXX
Select a sorting order.
search condition:” (
/
then ENTER).
Album
Title
XXXX
• The software keyboard appears on the screen.
Sort Order
Date
Bottom-Up
Cancel
2006/11/30
Play Time
00:00:59
Server
OK
XXXX
XXXXXX
1/24
Search
Tool
1
D
Title
Set the search condition.
XXXX
Album
Title
XXXX
Contains the following:
Date
5
6
Select “OK” on the “Sort” dialog screen (
ENTER).
/
then
2006/11/30
Play Time
00:00:59
Server
OK
Cancel
• The sorting starts based on your selection and sort results
are displayed.
• Even while sorting, you can select content to play. To
return to the sort screen, press RETURN during playback.
XXXXXX
1/24
Tool
1
D
5
6
Enter the word for search on the software keyboard
then ENTER).
Press RETURN to cancel the sort mode.
(
/
/
/
Select “OK” on the software keyboard (
ENTER).
/
then
Note
• The “Select a sorting order.” screen can be displayed while
navigating through the music categories.
• The software keyboard disappears.
• To cancel the search, select “Cancel” then press ENTER.
Adding files to My Playlist
7
Select “OK” on the “Search” dialog screen (
ENTER).
/
then
The Home Media Gallery function provides “My Playlist” - a self-
contained play list that allows you to bookmark your favorite
movie, music and photo files from the network. You can register,
edit, and sort up to 100 files in each Playlist List.
• The searching starts based on the word entered and
search results are displayed.
• Even while searching, you can select content to play. To
return to the search screen, press RETURN during
playback.
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
2
3
Select “Media Navigator” (
Select the desired music content to add to “My Playlist”
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
8
Press RETURN to cancel the search mode.
Note
(
/
• Search may not be available depending on the server used.
4
Press D to open the Tool Menu.
• A dialog screen appears.
Playlist Selection
Select a Playlist to register
Playlist1
Playlist2
Playlist3
Playlist4
Playlist5
20
0
0
0
0
OK
Cancel
82
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
To manually set:
5
Press ENTER.
Before setting up, check your media server for IP Address and
Subnet mask.
• A check mark is provided in the box at the selected Playlist
List.
1
2
3
Select “Automatically acquire IP” then press ENTER.
Select “No” ( then ENTER).
6
7
Press
to select “OK”.
/
Press ENTER.
• The selected content is added to the Playlist.
Select the setup item’s box (
ENTER).
/
/
/
then
Note
• The screen turns to entry mode for “IP Address” and
“Subnet mask”.
• No need to enter “Default Gateway” and “DNS Server”.
• When giving a slideshow of photo content, you can use Music
Playlist as for background music.
4
Enter the figures using buttons 0 to 9.
Setup
• Subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)
Enter the same figures as you checked.
• IP Address (such as 192.168.201.***)
Enter the same figures as used in the media server
(PC, etc.) you use. For ***, enter 3-digit figures (0 –
254) that have not been used for network connections
yet.
The “Setup” is used for “Network Setup”, “Auto Connection
Setup”, “Default Settings”, “Software Update” and “Home Media
Gallery Version”.
Setup
Network Setup
Auto Connection Setup
Default Settings
5
Press ENTER on the setup item’s box after the entry
is complete.
Software Update
Home Media Gallery Version
• The screen turns to setup selection mode.
• Repeat steps 2 to 4 to complete the necessary setup.
1/5
1
6
7
Select “OK” (
/
/
/
then ENTER).
• A restart dialog screen appears.
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
Press ENTER again on the dialog screen.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
• The setup finishes.
• The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery
screen returns.
2
3
Select “Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
Select “Network Setup”, “Auto Connection Setup”,
“Default Settings”, “Software Update” and “Home
Media Gallery Version” (
“Auto Connection Setup”
/
/
/
then ENTER).
When you enjoy content on the network, you can select from
the following options: “Last Connected Server” and “Single
Server/USB”. See “Auto Connection Setup” on page 86.
“Network Setup”
When you select “Network Setup” from the “Setup” menu, a
submenu is displayed to select “Auto” or “Manual” for
network connections.
“Wake on LAN (WOL)” functions to turn the last accessed
server’s power on if the server is WOL-compliant and is in
Standby or sleep mode, then display the Media Navigator
screen. During the WOL is activated, the “Start Server” dialog
screen displays and a message “The server is starting up.”
appears. If the server is not WOL-compliant or the WOL
function fails, the “Start Server” dialog appears on the
“Server List” screen and a message “Failed to start server.”
displays on the dialog screen.
For USB content, the Device List is displayed on the screen
if you have not checked in the “Single Server/USB” box after
selecting “Setup” and then “Auto Connection Setup”. You
can select the desired device and then content in it. If you
have checked in the box, the list is skipped (default setting)
and you can see the folder(s) or file(s) in the USB device that
has a single directory.
To automatically set:
The following setup is effective for “Auto” only. To
perform the procedure, DHCP on your server or router
must be valid.
1
2
3
Select “Automatically acquire IP” then press ENTER.
Select “Yes” (
/
then ENTER).
Select “OK” (
/
/
/
then ENTER).
• A restart dialog screen appears.
4
Press ENTER again on the dialog screen.
• The setup finishes.
• The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery
screen returns.
“Default Settings”
Setups you have entered within the Home Media Gallery
function return to default. When you select “Reset”, a
confirmation screen “To activate the default settings, restart
Home Media Gallery.” will appear. Press ENTER to reset to
default. When you select “Cancel”, the previous screen
displays (
/
then ENTER).
83
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
“Software Update”
“Move”
Select “Next” to follow the procedure on the subsequent
You can change the listing order of the content registered in My
Playlist.
screens or “Cancel” to return to the previous screen (
/
then ENTER). When update is completed, a confirmation
message “To activate the updated software, restart Home
Media Gallery.” appears. See “Software Update” on page 85.
1
Select “Move” from the Tool Menu.
• The content selected is placed in a yellow box (“Source
Selection” mode).
“Home Media Gallery Version”
2
Select the desired content (
/
then ENTER).
You can confirm the version and copyright information on
the Home Media Gallery software. Select “OK” to return to
the previous screen (ENTER).
• The selected content is highlighted in the yellow box. A
specific icon appears on the left (“Destination Selection
mode”).
3
Press
ENTER.
/
to move the content up or down, then
Editing files in My Playlist
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The highlight in the yellow box disappears and the specific
icon returns to the original one.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move another content.
2
3
Select “My Playlist” (
/
then ENTER).
4
5
Press RETURN.
Select “Movie Playlist”, “Music Playlist” or “Photo
Playlist” from the Playlist category (
/
then ENTER).
• A “Playlist” dialog screen appears.
• Five playlists are displayed.
Select “OK” (
/
then ENTER).
• Press D to open the Tool Menu and select an item on this
screen or next contents list screen ( then ENTER).
• Check the appropriate box: “Change Name”, “Move” or
“Delete from My Playlist” ( then ENTER).
• The dialog screen disappears and moving content
finishes.
• To cancel, select “Cancel” then ENTER.
/
/
/
/
“Delete from My Playlist”
“Change Name”
1
Select “Delete from My Playlist” from the Tool Menu.
1
2
3
Select “Change Name” from the Tool Menu.
• A dialog screen appears.
• A dialog screen appears.
2
Select “OK” (
/
then ENTER).
Select “Playlist Name” ( then ENTER).
• The software keyboard appears.
• The dialog screen disappears and the selected content is
deleted from My Playlist.
• To cancel, select “Cancel” then ENTER.
Select “OK” on the software keyboard (
ENTER).
/
/
/
then
Playing/displaying files from My Playlist
• The software keyboard disappears and “Playlist Name” in
the “Change Name” dialog screen returns.
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
4
Select “OK” when the new name is entered (
ENTER).
/
then
2
3
Select “My Playlist” (
/
then ENTER).
• The editing finishes and “Change Name” dialog screen
disappears.
• The new Playlist displays.
Select the desired Playlist from “Movie Playlist”, “Music
Playlist” or “Photo Playlist”.
4
5
Select the desired Playlist List (
/
then ENTER).
Movie Playlist
Soft Keyboard
Select the desired content (
/
/
/ then ENTER).
Playlist Name
Playlist1
20
0
• The selected content is played or displayed.
Title
Playlist1
0
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
1,2,3...
a,b,c...
A,B,C...
@,$,=...
a
i
b
j
c
k
s
d
l
e
m
u
f
g
o
h
p
x
Delete
Clear
0
n
v
0
q
y
r
t
w
Space
Switching the server
z
When one or more servers are connected within the network, you
can switch between servers.
OK
Cancel
1/5
1
Tool
D
1
2
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
• The on-screen keyboard (“Software Keyboard”) is
displayed only when you select “Search” or “Change
Name”.
Select “Media Navigator” (
/
then ENTER).
• The previous server is selected.
3
4
Press D to open the Tool Menu.
Choose “Select Server” (
/
then ENTER).
• The Server List is displayed.
• Pressing RETURN changes the screen to the Home Media
Gallery.
84
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Downloading the software for update
Perform the following procedure to download the software onto
your computer and copy it onto a USB flash drive.
5
Select the desired server (
/
then ENTER).
• The screen changes to “Media Navigator” on the selected
server.
1
2
Download the software.
Note
Extract the downloaded file.
• The Home Media Gallery can memorize previously connected
servers. When the Media Navigator is launched, available
servers are automatically searched and connected. To switch
between connected servers, choose server to another one,
select “Select Server” from the Tool Menu.
is in the sleep mode, the server name is dimmed (grayed out).
• The file extracts to a folder named “updater”.
3
Plug a USB flash drive into your PC and copy the
extracted folder onto it.
the root directory of your USB flash drive.
• In some cases, you may be able to start a media server if it
supports “Wake On LAN”. Select the server and press ENTER
to transmit a “Wake On LAN” command to the selected server.
• You cannot select a server unless that media server has been
set up.
Note
• If you change any of the names of the files or folders, updating
may not work properly.
• A ZIP compressed file cannot be used to update your software.
Make sure to decompress the file before copying it to the USB
flash drive. Software to decompress ZIP files is not supplied
with the plasma display. The software is available on the
Internet.
Resetting to default
You can reset the setups you have entered within the Home
Media Gallery function to default (See “Default Settings” on page
83).
Confirming the existing Home Media Gallery version
Be sure to check the version of the software you are using before
updating the software. You can check it with the following
procedure.
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
2
3
4
Select “Setup” (
Select “Default Settings” (
Select “Reset” ( then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
/
then ENTER).
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
/
2
3
Select “Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
• A restart dialog screen appears.
Select “Home Media Gallery Version” (
ENTER).
/
then
5
Press ENTER on the dialog screen.
• Jot down the Home Media Gallery Version displayed in the
screen.
Ex.) software Version: 1.0.xxx
• The setup finishes.
• The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen
returns.
4
Select “OK” to return to the previous screen (ENTER).
Other convenient features
Updating the software
Then perform the following procedure to update the software. Do
not turn the system off until the procedure is complete.
Screen saver
During navigation, the screen saver launches automatically
if no activity is sensed within five minutes.
• No screen saver is available while a movie or slideshow is
played.
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.
• The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.
• Pressing any key cancels screen saver. When canceled
with a USB device being connected, connecting operation
resumes.
2
3
Select “Setup” (
/
then ENTER).
Select “Software Update” (
/
then ENTER).
• A “Software Update” submenu appears.
Note
4
5
Remove the USB flash drive from your PC and plug it
into the plasma display.
• Pressing INFO to display the Player status or key guide
before screen saver is activated may cause image retention
to appear.
• Do not display the Player status and key guide for an
extended period of time while playing a movie or
slideshow.
Select “Next” (
/
then ENTER).
• The next screen appears. Complete the procedure
following the guidelines on the screen.
6
7
Press ENTER after the following steps are complete:
“Download”, “Write” and “Verify”
• A restart dialog screen appears.
Software Update
Press ENTER after reading a notice on the screen.
Software update is available on the Pioneer website (http://
www.pioneerelectronics.com). Make sure that you have a
USB flash drive. First download the software according to the
guidelines on the website and perform the following to update
the software.
• The system is restarted then the Home Media Gallery
screen returns.
• Software update finishes.
• You can remove the USB flash drive from the plasma
display.
85
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
Setup
Setup
Software Update
Auto Connection Setup
To check whether the software needs to be updated or not.
Home Media Gallery must be connected to a USB device.
Connect the USB device and press the Next button.
Last Connected Server
Single Server/USB
Current Version: 1.x.xx
Next
Cancel
OK
Cancel
1
1
Dialog Screen Message
Note
No.
001
Message
Problem
• Be sure to check that the version of the software has been
changed by comparing with the one written down after
updating the software (the procedure to check it is the same as
above.). If it has not changed, the update may have failed.
Please attempt the update again (the existing software can be
used if the update fails). If you still cannot update the software
after retrying, the file may have been damaged. Please return
to the procedure for Downloading the software for update.
• On average, it may take 15 minutes or more to complete a
software update.
• If you attempt a software update during the multiscreen mode,
the single screen automatically returns.
Content playback failed No details are available
(001). for the error
100
101
A communication error No further details are
occurred (100). available for the error
No response from the Timeout period reaches
server (101).
due to delayed server
response
102
103
Disconnected from the Cables are
network (102).
disconnected
Invalid response was
received from the
server (103).
Invalid response from
the server
“Auto Connection Setup”
300
500
501
503
This format is not
supported (300).
A file that is not
supported is selected
For extra convenience, you can toggle between the following
features:
Authorization failed
(500).
Failed to obtain
WMDRM authorization
“Last Connected
Server”
When you check in the “Last Connected Server”
box, the plasma display accesses the last server
using WOL (“Wake On LAN”) first as the Media
Navigator is selected from the Home Media
Gallery. The Media Navigator displays the last
server when WOL succeeds, while a server list is
displayed when WOL fails.
Authorization failed
(501).
Failed to obtain
WMDRM authorization
Authorization failed
(503). Please check for WMDRM authorization
trouble in routers,
hubs, and other
network devices.
Failed to obtain
WOL is activated to turn the last accessed server
On if the server is WOL-compliant and is in
Standby or sleep mode.
“Single Server/
USB”
This function is used only when a USB flash drive
or a single server is connected. You do not need
this function when a multi-card reader, or two or
more servers are connected.
504
505
Authorization failed
(504). The maximum
allowed number of
devices are connected
to the server.
Failed to obtain
WMDRM
USB:
• When USB flash drive is connected, the Devices
List is skipped as long as you have checked in
the “Single Server/USB” box. If not, the list may
be displayed at any time.
Authorization failed
(505). The content
license is off. Please
turn on the license
from the server.
Failed to obtain
WMDRM authorization
Media Navigator (Server):
• When a single server is connected, the Server
List is skipped as long as you have checked in
the “Single Server/USB” box. If not, the list may
be displayed at any time. When the “Last
Connected Server” box is checked, the other
server setup option – “Single Server/USB” –
becomes invalid.
• The message consists of “Error”, “Warning” and “Information” and is
displayed for 5 seconds.
Displaying pictures in the Home Media Gallery for an
extended period may cause an after-image.
86
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying through External Equipment
12
MAC (Media Access Control) Address
Glossary
An address attached to the port of any network device with an IP
address. The MAC address is expressed as “00:e0:36:01:23:xx”
and cannot be changed.
Default Gateway
Default gateway is a node on a computer network that serves as
an access point to another network. A default gateway (such as
a computer and router) is used to forward all traffic that is not
addressed to a station within the local subnet.
Mass Storage Class devices
The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage devices,
such as USB flash drive and digital cameras.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server
Provides a mechanism to allocate IP addresses to client hosts. In
most cases, a broadband router serves as a DHCP server in a
home network.
PlaysForSure
This unit incorporates PlaysForSure. “PlaysForSure” is a new
logo program from Microsoft Corporation. You can check for the
PlaysForSure logo at various online stores. Where you see the
PlaysForSure logo, you can be sure that the digital media you are
purchasing (music, video, pictures) will play on this unit.
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)
The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers to
recognize products that meet the new standard for home
network PCs and other digital devices, as set down in the DLNA
Guidelines for interoperability. This allows music, video, etc. to be
enjoyed from various devices over a home network. This unit is
compatible with music, photo and video content, and is based on
the DLNA Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines
v1.0. This unit can be used to playback music, photos and video
stored on a DLNA-compatible server connected through a LAN
cable.
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to the
simplified sharing of digital content, such as digital music,
photos and video among networked consumer electronics (CE)
and PCs. By establishing a platform of interoperability based on
open industry standards, DLNA delivers technical design
guidelines that companies can use to develop digital home
products that share content through wired or wireless networks
in the home.
Subnet mask
Used when IP addresses are broken into several parts. It is
expressed as “255.255.255.0”. In most cases, the Subnet mask is
automatically assigned by the DHCP server.
UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)
Architecture for pervasive peer-to-peer network connectivity of
devices of all form factors. It is designed to bring easy-to-use,
flexible, standardsbased connectivity to ad-hoc or unmanaged
networks whether in the home, in a small business, public
spaces, or attached to the Internet.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
USB provides a serial bus standard for connecting devices,
usually to computers such as PCs. The plasma display supports
the Mass Storage Class.
Windows Media Connect
DNS (Domain Name Service) Server
Microsoft Windows Media Connect is a new technology to
distribute music, photos and video stored on a PC with Windows
XP installed to a stereo system of TV. Using this technology you
can playback files stored on the PC from various devices
wherever you like in your home.
DNS Server is a server that determines the name of network-
computer within the Internet. The server functions to exchange IP
address to the hostname, hostname to the IP address.
Ethernet
A frame-based computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs). The plasma display supports 100BASE-TX.
Windows Media DRM
Windows Media DRM is copyright protection technology
developed by Microsoft Corporation. It enables content providers
to distribute over the Internet music, video and other digital
media content in a protected, encrypted file format.
IP (Internet Protocol) Address
A unique number that devices use in order to identify and
communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet
Protocol standard, such as “192.168.1.xxx”. No duplicate
numbers are allowed within the network.
Windows Media Player
A free digital media player application provided by Microsoft that
is used for playing audio, video and images on PCs.
LAN Cable
A cable that has an eight-pin modular plug on each end and is
different from a telephone plug which has four pins. A straight
cable is used when connecting the plasma display to a home
network via a hub. A cross-over cable is used when connecting
directly to a PC. Use category 5 (CAT-5) LAN cables.
Windows Media Player 11
The functionality of Windows Media Connect has been
integrated into this version of Windows Media Player. After
installing Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Connect
will not function. See Microsoft’s website for details.
87
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the HDMI Control
13
Chapter 13
Using the HDMI Control
Using the HDMI Control functions
• Press VOL +/– or e to adjust volume
for the AV system.
You can operate such Pioneer devices as a recorder, player or AV
system support the HDMI Control functions using the remote
control of the plasma display.
The HDMI Control functions include playback of content using
on-screen control panel on the plasma display. For details, see
the table below.
• Press , , , , ENTER, RETURN
(
) or color (BLUE, RED, YELLOW,
GREEN) buttons to use functions such
as the disc navigator on the connected
recorder or player.
Note
• Maximum number of devices that can be connected and
controlled using the remote control unit of the plasma display
is as follows: recorder x 2, player x 2, AV system x 1.
• Not all device operations may be available for HDMI Control
functions.
HDMI Control functions
Usable
devices
Function
Description
Note
The proper input source is automatically selected Recorder/
Playback of
content
• When using the HDMI Control functions, operate the remote
control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor
(t) located at the bottom right of the front panel of the plasma
display.
• You cannot use two or more HDMI terminals at the rear of the
plasma display at the same time except “Power Off” and
“Display Language Setup” functions.
and the content is played back on the plasma
display as you press PLAY on the connected device
player
Recorder/player operation can be controlled on-
screen or with the remote control unit of the
plasma display (play, stop, fast forward/reverse,
etc.)
Recorder/
player
On-screen
control
Information on the display menu language is
Recorder/
Display
Language
Setup
transferred to the recorder or player connected to player
the plasma display. For details, see the operation
manual that came with the recorder or player.
Receiver/amplifier operation can also be controlled AV system
with the remote control unit of the plasma display
(volume, surround mode and input selection of the
HDMI terminal)
AV system
control
The plasma display can be turned On when the
connected recorder(s) or player(s) is turned On and player
images are input to the plasma display.
Recorder/
Power On
Power Off
The connected device(s) can be turned Off when Recorder/
the plasma display is turned Off
player/AV
system
88
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the HDMI Control
13
On-screen control panel
Making the HDMI Control connections
When you make changes in connections between the plasma
display and the device(s) that supports the HDMI Control
functions or settings for the “HDMI Control Setting”, perform the
following procedure:
For an AV system
1
Switches the surround mode in order
HDMI Control
5
2
3
4
Switches the input source in reverse order
Switches the surround mode in reverse order
Closes the screen to return to the HDMI Control
menu
Displays the model number of the connected
device
1
2
3
6
7
SURROUND+
1
2
Turn on the plasma display and all the connected devices.
Confirm that the setting in “Input Setting” for “HDMI Control
Setting” is properly entered according to the connected devices.
Also confirm the HDMI Control related settings in the connected
devices.
INPUT- INPUT+
5
SURROUND-
6
7
4
Void
HDMI CONTROL Exit
Switches the input source in order
3
Switch to the HDMI input terminals to which the devices are
Press or on the remote control unit of the plasma display to
switch the surround mode in order or in reverse order, or
to switch the input source in order or in reverse order. Pressing
HDMI CONTROL turns the control panel screen off to return to
the HDMI Control menu.
connected to check if audio and video images are properly output
and displayed.
4
Try turning off the plasma display, then turn the power back
on to the plasma display.
Connecting an AV amp/BD player
Note
• You cannot operate the recorder/player when you press or
to switch the input source during operation. To resume the
operation, return to the HDMI Control menu and select the
desired function again.
4
5
Rear view
For a recorder
4
5
1
Skips commercials
Fast reverse
Stops playback
Closes the screen to return to the HDMI Control
HDMI Control
5
2
3
4
1
2
3
6
7
menu
5
Displays the model number of the connected
device
Starts playback
Fast forward
6
7
4
HDMI CONTROL Exit
Optical digital
cable (commercially
available)
Press or on the remote control unit of the plasma display
to select fast reverse or fast forward mode, to skip
commercials or to stop playback. Pressing ENTER starts
playback and HDMI CONTROL turns the control panel screen off
to return to the HDMI Control menu.
AV cable
(commercially
available)
HDMI compliant
cable (HDMI cable
having the HDMI
mark)
For a player
AV amp
1
Displays the DVD disc menu or Blu-ray disc's pop-
up menu on the player
Fast reverse
Stops playback
Closes the screen to return to the HDMI Control
menu
Displays the model number of the connected
device
HDMI Control
5
2
3
4
1
2
3
6
7
MENU
5
4
HDMI CONTROL Exit
6
7
Starts playback
Fast forward
BD player
Press or on the remote control unit of the plasma display
to select fast reverse or fast forward mode, to display the DVD
disc menu or Blu-ray disc’s pop-up menu on the player or to
stop playback. Pressing ENTER starts playback and HDMI
CONTROL turns the control panel screen off to return to the
HDMI Control menu.
89
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the HDMI Control
13
Connecting a BD player
4
5
4
5
Rear view
Rear view
4
5
HDMI compliant
cable (HDMI cable
having the HDMI
mark)
AV cable
(commercially
available)
HDMI compliant cable
(HDMI cable having the
HDMI mark)
Optical digital
cable (commercially
available)
BD player
AV amp
BD player
Note
• After making connections, enter the setting in “Input Setting”
for “HDMI Control Setting”. Be sure that the setting is entered
in each HDMI input terminal to which the device is connected.
• Settings in the connected device(s) are also required to use the
HDMI Control functions. For details, see the operation manual
that came with the connected device(s).
• Maximum number of devices that can be connected and
controlled using the remote control unit of the plasma display
is as follows: recorder x 2, player x 2, AV system x 1.
• When connecting an AV system, be sure to place and connect
it between the plasma display and recorder or player.
• Do not connect an AV system that does not support the HDMI
Control functions between the plasma display and a recorder/
player, otherwise the HDMI Control functions may not operate
properly.
• For more information on the devices that support the HDMI
Control functions, check the Pioneer Web site (see back cover).
Setting the HDMI Control
• When connecting an AV system that does not support the
HDMI Control functions and a player/recorder that supports
the HDMI Control functions to the plasma display, connect the
AV system to the DIGITAL OUT terminal and the AUDIO OUT
terminal on the plasma display using an optical digital cable
and an AV cable (commercially available), and the recorder/
player to the HDMI terminal using an HDMI compliant cable
(see the illustration). Please note that signals input from the
HDMI terminals will not be output from the DIGITAL OUT
terminal.
Selecting the input terminal
Select the HDMI terminal to which the external device is
connected in order to use the HDMI Control functions.
1
2
3
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
/
then ENTER).
Select “HDMI Control Setting” (
/
then ENTER).
HDMI Control Setting
Input Setting
INPUT 4
On
Power Off Control
Power-On Ready
On
Hold Sound Status
Off
Power On Test
Power Off Test
4
5
Select “Input Setting” (
/
then ENTER).
Select “INPUT 4”, “INPUT 5”, “INPUT 6” or “INPUT 7” (
then ENTER).
/
Only the device that supports the HDMI Control and is connected
through the selected INPUT terminal is available for the HDMI
Control functions.
6
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
90
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the HDMI Control
13
3
4
Select the desired device (
/
then ENTER).
Note
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
• If you have selected “Off” in step 5, a message “Operations
cannot be carried out. Confirm the HDMI control settings.”
appears when HDMI CONTROL is pressed on the remote
control unit.
• If you operate an HDMI supported device(s) using an HDMI
terminal other than the terminal selected in “Input Setting”, a
malfunction may occur. When connecting to any HDMI
terminals other than the terminal selected in “Input Setting”,
make sure to enter the settings of the external device(s) so that
the HDMI Control function does not operate.
Note
• Devices that can be checked for Power On/Off Test are those
connected to HDMI terminals as set in “Input Setting”.
• If the Power On/Off Test fails, check for the connection and
setting.
Using the HDMI Control menus
You can enjoy various functions with the connected Pioneer
recorder, player or AV system that supports the HDMI Control
functions by selecting and using the corresponding HDMI
Control menus.
Selecting the Power Off Control
You can select whether or not the connected device is turned Off
when the plasma display is turned Off.
(factory default is “On”)
1
2
Press HOME MENU.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press HOME MENU.
Select “Option” (
Select “HDMI Control Setting” (
Select “Power Off Control” (
Select “On” ( then ENTER).
Select “HDMI Control” (
/
then ENTER).
/
then ENTER).
The HDMI Control menu is displayed.
/
then ENTER).
HDMI Control
/
then ENTER).
/
Disc Navigator
CTRL Panel(AV-SYS)
Playback CTRL Panel
Switch to AV Sound
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Note
• The “Power Off Control” function is valid for the devices
connected to any of HDMI terminals at the rear of the plasma
display.
HDMI Control menu
Item
Description
Selecting the Power-On Ready
Disc Navigator
Displays a title list of the connected recorder or player
You can select whether or not the plasma display is turned On when
the connected Pioneer recorder or player is turned On and images
are input to the plasma display.
CTRL Panel
(AV-SYS)
Displays the control panel for the connected AV system on
the plasma display
(factory default is “On”)
Playback CTRL
Panel
Displays the control panel for the connected recorder or
player on the plasma display
1
2
3
4
Repeat steps 1 to 3 in Selecting the Power Off Control.
Select “Power-On Ready” ( then ENTER).
Select “On” ( then ENTER).
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
Switch to AV
Sound (Switch to system to which sound is output
PDP Sound)
Switches between the plasma display and the connected AV
/
/
Note
• To use the HDMI Control functions, a Pioneer recorder, player
or AV system that supports the HDMI Control functions is
required.
Selecting the Hold Sound Status
You can select whether or not the function is held for the
connected Pioneer AV system even if the system is placed into
standby during HDMI Control operations.
• Not all operations may be controlled for the connected devices.
(factory default is “Off”)
• The HDMI Control menu is not selectable when “Off” is
selected in “Input Setting” for the “HDMI Control Setting”
menu.
• The CTRL Panel (AV-SYS) menu is only available when the
sound is output from the AV system.
1
2
3
4
Repeat steps 1 to 3 in Selecting the Power Off Control.
Select “Hold Sound Status” ( then ENTER).
Select “On” ( then ENTER).
Press HOME MENU to exit the menu.
/
/
• The Playback CTRL Panel menu is selectable when the
connected recorder or player is ready to operate.
• You can also display the HDMI Control menu by pressing
HDMI CONTROL on the remote control unit of the plasma
display.
Power On/Off Test
You can confirm if the Power On/Off control function is effective
between the plasma display and the connected device.
1
2
Repeat steps 1 to 3 in Selecting the Power Off Control.
Select “Power On Test” or “Power Off Test” (
ENTER).
/
then
A list containing devices appears when multiple HDMI devices
are connected to the HDMI terminals.
91
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
Chapter 14
Useful Remote Control Features
Learning function of the remote control
unit
Presetting manufacturer codes to control
You can operate the connected AV products (AV receiver, Cable
Box, SAT tuner, VCR, DVD, DVD recorder, BD player, LD) using
the remote control’s learning function. The remote control can
memorize other remote control’s codes.
Presetting manufacturer codes
1
2
Slide the Mode switch to match the type of device to be
preset.
2 cm to 5 cm (0.8 inches to 2.0 inches)
Press EDIT/LEARN and 1 at the same time.
• The LED flashes.
3
Press 0 to 9 to enter the manufacturer code. See page
94.
• Preset mode is finished when the LED blinks Off.
Library Search
In the event that the device code for a particular target unit is
unknown, cycle through the available codes for that type of
device. Sample the functions from each code in order to find the
code that properly operates the target device.
Remote control of
AV product
Remote control
(Supplied accessory)
1
Slide the Mode switch to match the type of device to be
preset.
Using the learning function
2
Press EDIT/LEARN and 3 at the same time.
1
2
Slide the Mode switch to match the type of device to be
learned.
• The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit
enters the Library Search programming mode.
Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time.
3
4
5
Press either SOURCE POWER, PLAY, 1 or CH+ to sample
the selected code.
• The LED flashes.
3
Press a button to be learned.
If the code is missing, press
code or return to the previous code and repeat step 3.
/
to advance to the next
• The LED lights up.
• For the functions that can be learned, see pages 99 to 102.
• When the device’s remote is memorized, the LED flashes.
Press ENTER when the code that properly operates the
target device is found.
4
Press EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Learn mode.
• All the available buttons for the selected mode are
programmed to the remote control. The remote control
unit returns to normal operation (LED lights for one
second to confirm addition).
Note
• To exit the Learn mode before it is complete, press EDIT/
LEARN again.
• If the Mode switch selection is changed when EDIT/LEARN
and 2 are pressed (the LED is flashing), the Learn session is
canceled.
Delete Learning
You can delete a learned code by either overwriting it with a new
code on the same button or performing the procedure below.
• If the Mode switch selection is changed when a button to be
learned is pressed after EDIT/LEARN and 2 have been pressed
(the LED lights up), the Learn session is not canceled and the
selected mode and button remain effective.
1
Press EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time.
• The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit
enters the Learning mode.
• If no operation is performed for more than one minute after
having pressed EDIT/LEARN and 2 (the LED is flashing), the
Learn session is canceled.
• If a button to be learned is pressed after having pressed EDIT/
LEARN and 2 (the LED is lit), the Learn session is canceled in
30 seconds and the LED restarts blinking again.
2
Press and hold TV a for more than two seconds.
• The remote control unit starts deleting all learned codes in
the selected mode (marked by a lit LED).
• When completed, the LED blinks Off and the remote
control unit returns to normal operation.
• Code transmission finishes in approximately two seconds. Do
not interrupt it halfway. Wait until the LED flashes again.
• When using any of the receiver buttons (a, INPUT, or VOL +/
–), the learned manufacturer code remains the same
regardless of the Mode switch position or even if the switch is
shifted to a different position.
92
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
Manufacturing Reset
All learned and preset codes can be returned to the factory
defaults regardless of the mode.
1
2
Press EDIT/LEARN and TV a at the same time. The Mode
switch setting is ignored.
• The LED indicator flashes and the remote control unit
enters the Manufacturing Reset mode.
Press D (yellow) to reset the remote control.
• The manufacturing reset is complete. The LED flashes for
one second then the remote control unit returns to normal
operation.
Note
• To exit the Edit mode before it is complete, press EDIT/LEARN
again.
• If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Edit
mode, the Edit session is canceled.
• If no operation is performed within one minute, the Edit
session is canceled.
• When you enter an unlisted code, the LED flashes repeatedly.
• If the tables on pages 94 to 98 do not include your device’s
manufacturer or the remote control does not work, use the
Learn mode.
• The initial mode is “PIONEER”.
• When using any of the receiver buttons (a, INPUT, or VOL +/
–) to cancel the Learn mode, follow the procedure with the
Mode switch set to “TV”. You cannot cancel the mode
otherwise.
• You may not be able to partially or entirely control some
equipment in the tables.
93
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
Programming codes
CABLE
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
A-Mark
ABC
0008, 0144
Fosgate
0276
NSC
0012, 0637
0017
Signature
Sony
0011
0237, 0003, 0008,
0014, 0011, 0017
GE
0144, 0021
Oak
1006, 1506, 1606
General Instrument
0476, 0810, 0276,
0003, 0012, 0014, 0011
Optimus
Pace
0021
Sprucer
0144, 0021
Accuphase
Acorn
0003, 0014, 0011, 0017
0237
1877, 0877, 0237, 0008 Starcom
0003, 0014
Gibralter
Global
0003
Panasonic
0000, 0008, 0144,
0107, 0021
Stargate
Storm
0014
Action
0237
1327
0637
Active
0237
GMI
0883
Panther
Paragon
Penney
Philips
0637
Supercable
Supermax
Thomson
Tocom
0276
Americast
Amino
0899
GoldStar
Hamlin
Hitachi
0144
0000, 0008, 0525
0000, 0637
0883
1602, 1822
0237, 0260
0276
0009, 0273
0003, 0008, 0009,
0011, 0154
1256
Archer
1305, 0317
0012
BCC
Pioneer
1877, 0877, 0144,
0533, 0023, 0260, 1021
Torx
0003
Bell & Howell
Bell South
British Telecom
Century
Citation
Clearmaster
ClearMax
Cleartron
Cool Box
Coolmax
Digeo
0014
Houston
i3 Micro
Insight
Jebsee
Jerrold
0011
Toshiba
0000
0899
1602
Prism
0012
Tristar
0883
0003
0476, 0810
0014
Pulsar
0000
United Cable
US Electronics
V2
0276, 0003, 0014, 0011
0008
Quasar
0000
0276, 0003, 0008, 0017
0017
0476, 0810, 0276,
0003, 0012, 0014, 0011
RadioShack
RCA
0883
0883
0883
1256, 0021
0276, 0279, 0273
0011
Videoway
Viewmaster
ViewmaxPro
Vision
0000
0883
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Motorola
0000
Regal
0883
1327
0003
Rembrandt
Runco
1544
0883
1376, 0476, 0810,
0276, 1187, 1254,
0014, 1106
0000
0883
0883
Samsung
Scientific Atlanta
0003, 0144, 0023
1877, 0877, 0477,
0237, 0003, 0000,
0008, 0012, 0017, 0021
Vortex View
Zenith
0883
1187
0000, 0525, 0899, 0017
Digi
0637
Multitech
Myrio
0883
Director
Dumont
Emerson
0476
1602, 1822
0008
0637
Nova Vision
Novaplex
Sejin
1602
0011
0014
0008, 0017
Signal
SATELLITE
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
A-Mark
0210
GE
0392, 0566
0869
MegaSat
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Motorola
NEC
1551
Realistic
0052
AlphaStar
Amino
0772
General Instrument
GOI
0724, 0269
0749
Samsung
1377, 1142, 1276,
1108, 1109, 1442, 1609
1615
0775, 1775
1246
Bell ExpressVu
Channel Master
Chaparral
Crossdigital
DirecTV
0775
Goodmans
Hisense
Hitachi
0869, 0856
0178, 1270
0099
Sanyo
SKY
1219
0212
1535
0856, 0099
0639, 1639, 1640
0869
0053, 0209, 0216
1109
0749, 0819, 1250
0238
Netsat
Sony
Homecable
Houston
HTS
Next Level
Optimus
Panasonic
Pansat
0869
Star Choice
Star Trak
STS
1377, 0392, 0566,
0639, 1639, 1142,
0247, 0749, 1749,
0724, 0819, 1856,
1076, 1108, 0099,
1109, 1392, 1414,
1442, 1443, 1444,
1538, 1609, 1640
0775, 0280
0775, 0280, 1775
1142, 0749, 1749,
1442, 1443, 1444, 1538
0724
0772, 0869, 0180
0210
0247, 0701, 0152
0647, 1551, 1807
0724
Hughes Network
Systems
Thomson
Tivo
0392, 0566
1142, 1442, 1443,
1444, 1538
Paysat
Humax
iLo
1790
Philips
1142, 0749, 1749,
0775, 0724, 0819,
1076, 0722, 0099, 1442
1535
Toshiba
0749, 1749, 0790,
0819, 0082, 1285
Innova
IQ
0099
0210
Dish Network System 1505, 1005, 0775,
1170, 1775
IQ Prism
Janeil
0210
Pioneer
1142, 0329, 1442
0869
UltimateTV
Uniden
1392, 1640
0152
Primestar
Proscan
Proton
0724, 0722, 0052,
0074, 0238
Dishpro
1505, 1005, 0775, 1775 Jerrold
0869
0392, 0566
1535
Echostar
1505, 1005, 0775,
0159, 0269, 0280,
1170, 1775
JVC
0775, 1170, 1775
0210
US Digital
USDTV
Voom
1535
King Viper
Legend
LG
RadioShack
0566, 0775, 0869,
0052, 0269
1535
0269
0869
Expressvu
Fortec Star
Funai
0775, 1775
1550
1226, 1414
0724, 0722
0869
RCA
0392, 0566, 1142,
0775, 0855, 0143,
1392, 1442
Zenith
0856, 1856, 1810
Magnavox
McIntosh
1377
94
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
VCR
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
A-Mark
0037, 0240, 0000,
0278, 0046
CyberPower
Daewoo
1972
Headquarter
Hewlett Packard
HI-Q
0046
Memorex
0035, 0162, 0037,
0048, 0039, 0047,
0240, 0000, 0104,
0209, 0072, 0278,
0062, 0054, 0046,
0307, 0479, 1037,
1162, 1262
0037, 0045, 0278,
1972
0020, 0046, 0561, 1137
ABS
1972
0035, 0047, 0000
Admiral
0060, 0048, 0039,
Daytron
Dell
0037, 0278, 0020
1972
Hitachi
0035, 0037, 0045,
0000, 0042, 0041,
0065, 0082, 0089,
0105, 0166, 0235, 0292
0047, 0104, 0209,
0020, 0062, 0065, 0479
Denon
0081, 0042
0041
Adventura
Adyson
Aiko
0037, 0240, 0000
0072
Derwent
DirecTV
Dual
0739
Howard Computers
HP
1972
Metz
0037
0278
0000
1972
MGA
0060, 0240, 0043, 0061
0240
Aiwa
0037, 0000, 0124,
0307, 1137
Dumont
Durabrand
Dynatech
Electrohome
0040
Hughes Network
Systems
0042, 0739
MGN Technology
Microsoft
Midland
Mind
0039, 0038
0240, 0000
1972
Akai
0041, 0061, 0106,
0175, 0242
Humax
Hush
0739
0240
0060, 0037, 0240,
1972
1972
0000, 0043, 0209, 0061
Alba
0209, 0072, 0278
1972
Hytek
0047, 0000, 0072
1972
Minolta
0042, 0105
0060, 0048, 0047,
0000, 0042, 0067,
0043, 0041, 0061,
0075, 0173, 0214,
0242, 0443
Alienware
Allegro
Electrophonic
Emerald
0037
iBUYPOWER
ITT Nokia
Janeil
Mitsubishi
0039, 1137
0278
0184, 0121
0240, 0041
0240
America Action
American High
Amstrad
Emerex
0032
0035, 0081
0000
Emerson
0037, 0184, 0240,
0000, 0121, 0043,
0209, 0002, 0278,
0202, 0208, 0061,
0212, 0378, 0479,
0561, 0593, 1593
Jensen
JVC
0067, 0041
0067, 0041, 0008,
0058, 0061, 0206,
Anam National
Asha
0226
Motorola
Movie Walker
MTC
0035, 0048
0072
0207, 0235, 1162, 1707
0240
Astra
0035, 0240
0058
KEC
0037, 0278
0240, 0000, 0072
0000
Audio-Technica
Audiovox
Avis
Kenwood
KLH
0067, 0041, 0038, 0046 MTX
0037, 0278, 0038, 0054 ESA
1137
1346
0072
Multitech
0039, 0000, 0072
0240, 0104, 0058
0000, 0072
0240
EverFocus
Fisher
Kodak
KTV
0035, 0037
0000
NAD
NEC
Beaumark
Bell & Howell
0039, 0047, 0000,
0104, 0046, 0054
0104, 0067, 0041,
0038, 0040, 0050,
0082, 0457
0035, 0048, 0039,
LG
0037, 0240, 0038,
1037, 1137
0000, 0104, 0046, 0479 Fuji
0035, 0033
0000
Broksonic
0184, 0121, 0209,
Fujitsu
Linksys
Lloyd’s
1972
New Tech
Nikko
0072
0002, 0208, 0479, 1815
Funai
0037, 0000, 0072,
0278, 0593, 1593
0240, 0000, 0072,
0038, 0040, 0208
0037, 0278
0037, 0278
0034
Calix
0037
Nikkodo
Nikon
Candle
Canon
Capehart
Carrera
Carver
CCE
0037, 0038
0035, 0034
0002, 0020, 0062
0240
Garrard
Gateway
GE
0000
Loewe
Logik
0081
1195, 1196, 1972
0060, 0035, 0048,
0240, 0000, 0149,
0065, 0077, 0202,
0760, 0761
0240, 0000, 0072, 0011 Nishi
0240
Lumatron
Luxor
LXI
0278
Niveus Media
1972
0046, 0106
Noblex
0240
0035, 0081
0072, 0278
0278
0037, 0000, 0042,
0067, 0054
Northgate
Olympus
Onkyo
1972
0035, 0162, 0104, 0226
0222
Cineral
CineVision
Citizen
Gemini
0060
M Electronic
Magnasonic
0240
1137
Genexxa
Go Video
0037, 0000, 0278
0037, 0240, 0000,
0072, 0278, 0020,
0082, 0593
Optimus
1062, 0035, 0162,
0037, 0048, 0047,
0240, 0000, 0104,
0062, 0058, 0432,
0593, 1048, 0054,
1162, 1262
0035, 0037, 0240,
0240, 0432, 0526,
0000, 0209, 0278, 0479
0614, 0663, 1137, 1150
Classic
Colortyme
Colt
0037
GoldStar
0035, 0037, 0039,
0000, 0278, 0038,
0054, 1137
Magnavox
0035, 0037, 0048,
0039, 0081, 0240,
0000, 0149, 0011,
0054, 0226, 0563,
0593, 0618, 1593
0060, 0035, 0045, 0278
0000, 0072
Craig
0037, 0047, 0240,
0072, 0271
Goodmans
Gradiente
0037, 0081, 0000,
Optonica
Orion
0062
0072, 0278, 0020, 0062
0184, 0240, 0000,
Criterion
Crosley
0000, 0072
0000, 0008
0081, 0042, 0011
0081, 0034, 0226
0000
Magnin
0240
0104, 0121, 0209,
0002, 0278, 0208, 0479
0035, 0081, 0000, 0149 Granada
Marantz
Marta
0035, 0081, 0038, 0062
Crown
0072, 0278
Grundig
0037
Panama
0035
Curtis Mathes
0060, 0035, 0162,
0240, 0000, 0041,
0278, 0432, 0760
Harley Davidson
Harman/Kardon
Harvard
Matsui
0037, 0209
0081, 0038, 0075
0072
Matsushita
Media Center PC
MEI
0035, 0162, 0081, 1162
1972
0035
Cybernex
0240
Harwood
0072
95
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
VCR
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Panasonic
1062, 0035, 0162,
0000, 0020, 0077,
0225, 0226, 0227,
0246, 0378, 0614,
0616, 1162, 1262
Realistic
0035, 0162, 0037,
0048, 0047, 0240,
0000, 0104, 0121,
0278, 0046, 0062,
0065, 1162
Sonographe
Sony
0046
Trix
0037
0035, 0047, 0032,
0033, 0000, 0067,
0034, 0046, 0022,
0011, 0226, 0275,
0636, 1032, 1546,
1702, 1703, 1896, 1972
Ultra
0045, 0278, 0020
0240
Unitech
Vector
0045
Vector Research
Vextra
0184, 0038, 0040
0072
Penney
0035, 0162, 0037,
0047, 0081, 0240,
0000, 0042, 0067,
0038, 0040, 0054, 0077
ReplayTV
Ricavision
Ricoh
0614, 0616
1972
Victor
0067, 0041, 0008
0034
Soundmaster
Stack 9
STS
0000
Video Concepts
0045, 0040, 0061,
0210, 0242
Rio
1137
1972
Pentax
Philco
0042, 0065, 0105
Runco
0039
0042, 0105
0000, 0072
0000
Videomagic
Videosonic
Viewsonic
Villain
0037
0035, 0081, 0000,
0209, 0479
Salora
0075
SV2000
SVA
0240, 0000, 0072
1972
Samsung
0060, 0240, 0045,
0000, 0038, 0077,
0432, 0739
Philips
0035, 0162, 0048,
0081, 0045, 0000,
0209, 0034, 0062,
0616, 0618, 0739,
1081, 1181, 1266
Sylvania
0035, 0081, 0000,
0043, 0593, 1593
0000
Voodoo
1972
Samtron
Sanky
0240
Symphonic
0240, 0000, 0002,
0593, 1593
Wards
0060, 0035, 0037,
0048, 0047, 0081,
0033, 0240, 0045,
0000, 0042, 0043,
0041, 0072, 0038,
0149, 0046, 0058,
0062, 0065, 0011,
0212, 0479, 0760
0048, 0039
Sansui
0240, 0000, 0067,
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Tandy
1972
0209, 0041, 0072,
Pilot
0037
1972
0002, 0082, 0271, 0479
Pioneer
0162, 0081, 0042,
0000, 0104
0067, 0058, 0168, 1337
Sanyo
0047, 0240, 0000,
0104, 0046, 0159,
0372, 0479
Tatung
0048, 0081, 0000,
0067, 0041, 0008
Polk Audio
Portland
Presidian
Profitronic
Proscan
Protec
0081
0278, 0020
1593
Teac
0000, 0067, 0041
Scientific Atlanta
Scott
0008
Technics
0035, 0162, 0037,
0000, 0246
Wharfedale
0593
0240
0184, 0045, 0121,
White Westinghouse 0000, 0209, 0072,
0278, 0479
0043, 0208, 0210, 0212
0060, 0202, 0760, 0761
0000, 0072
0072
Teknika
0035, 0037, 0000
0240
Sears
0060, 0035, 0162,
0037, 0048, 0039,
0047, 0033, 0045,
0000, 0042, 0104,
0067, 0043, 0209,
0041, 0072, 0046,
0034, 0054, 0057,
0058, 0011, 0065, 0105
Telecorder
Telefunken
World
0209, 0002, 0479
Protech
Pulsar
0041, 0208
XR-1000
0035, 0240, 0000,
0072, 0208
0039, 0240, 0278
0240
Pulser
Tevion
0479
Yamaha
Zenith
0041, 0038
Quarter
Quartz
0046
Thomas
Thomson
Tisonic
Tivo
0000, 0002
0060, 0041, 0202
0278
0037, 0039, 0033,
0000, 0209, 0041,
0278, 0011, 0034,
0479, 1137, 1139
0035, 0047, 0046
Quasar
0035, 0162, 0002,
0077, 0226, 1162
0618, 0636, 0739,
1337, 1996
RadioShack
0035, 0162, 0037,
0048, 0047, 0240,
0000, 0104, 0046,
0062, 1037, 1162
Sensory Science
Sharp
1155
ZT Group
1972
0048, 0047, 0032,
TMK
0240, 0000, 0208
0037
0000, 0062, 0065, 0848
TNIX
Shintom
0039, 0240, 0000,
0072, 0208
Tocom
Toshiba
0240
Radix
Randex
RCA
0037
0240, 0045, 0000,
0043, 0209, 0041,
0054, 0057, 0062,
0210, 0212, 0366,
1008, 1972, 1996
0278
0037
Shogun
0240
0060, 0035, 0048,
0240, 0045, 0000,
0042, 0149, 0880,
0761, 0760, 0202,
0166, 0106, 0105,
0077, 0065, 0058, 0054
Siemens
Signature
0037, 0104
0060, 0035, 0037,
0048, 0000, 0149,
0046, 0065, 0479
0037, 0240, 0072
0614, 0616, 1137
Tosonic
Totevision
Touch
Singer
0037, 0240
1972
Sonic Blue
96
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
PVR
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
ABS
1972
HP
1972
0739
Niveus Media
Northgate
Panasonic
Philips
1972
Stack 9
1972
Alienware
CyberPower
Dell
1972
Hughes Network
Systems
1972
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Tivo
1972
1972
0614, 0616
0618, 0739
1337
1972
1972
Humax
0739
1972
1972
1972
1972
1972
1972
0618, 0636, 0739, 1337
DirecTV
0739
Hush
Pioneer
Toshiba
1008, 1972, 1996
EverFocus
Gateway
1346
iBUYPOWER
Linksys
RCA
0880
Touch
1972
1972
1972
1972
1195, 1196, 1972
0614
ReplayTV
Samsung
Sonic Blue
Sony
0614, 0616
0739
Viewsonic
Voodoo
Go Video
Media Center PC
Microsoft
Mind
Hewlett Packard
Howard Computers
1972
0614, 0616
0636, 1972
ZT Group
1972
DVD
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
3D LAB
Accurian
Acoustic Solutions
Adcom
0503, 0539
1072, 1416, 1737
0730
CAVS
1057
Enterprise
Entivo
Enzer
0591
Kawasaki
Kenwood
KLH
0790
Celestial
Centrex
Centrios
Cinea
1020
0503, 0539
0770
0490, 0534, 0682, 0737
0717, 0790, 1020, 1149
0533
0672, 1004
1577
1094
ESA
1443
Kloss
Afreey
0698
0831
Firstline
Fisher
Funai
0651
Konka
Koss
0711, 0721
0651, 0769, 0896,
1061, 1423
1421
Aiwa
0641
CineVision
0876, 0833, 0869
1003, 0695, 1277
0571
0670
Akai
0695, 0705, 0770, 1089 Citizen
0675, 1334
Alba
0672, 0717
0790
Clairtone
Gateway
GE
1073, 1077, 1158, 1194 Kreisen
Alco
Coby
0778, 0852, 1077,
1086, 1107, 1165,
1177, 1351
0522, 0815, 0717
0573, 0744, 0717,
1730, 1443, 1304,
1158, 1148, 1144,
1099, 1075, 1044,
0869, 0833, 0783,
0741, 0715
Krell
1498
Allegro
0869
Go Video
Lafayette
Landel
Lasonic
Lecson
Lenoxx
LG
1369
Amphion Media
Works
0872, 1245
0826
Craig
0831
0627, 0798, 1173, 1747
1533
AMW
0872, 1245
Creative
0503, 0539
Apex Digital
0533, 0672, 0717,
0755, 0794, 0796,
0797, 1004, 1020,
1056, 1061, 1100
Curtis Mathes
CyberHome
1087
1127
0816, 0874, 1017,
1019, 1023, 1024,
1117, 1129, 1502, 1537
0591, 0741, 0801, 0869
1058, 1158, 1416,
1440, 1656
0511, 0741
0783
Go Vision
GoldStar
Goodmans
GPX
1071, 1072
0741, 0801, 0869
0790
LiteOn
Arcam
0732
Cytron
0705
Loewe
Arrgo
1023
Daewoo
0784, 0705, 0770,
0833, 0869, 1169,
1172, 1234, 1242,
1441, 1443
0699, 0769
0490, 0651
0717
Logix
Aspire Digital
Astar
0594, 1168, 1407
1489, 1494, 1678, 1679
0736
Gradiente
Greenhill
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
Magnasonic
Magnavox
0651, 0675
0503, 0539, 0646,
0675, 1506
0782, 1159
0503, 0539, 0675
1533, 1273, 1373
0651
Audiologic
Audiovox
0539, 0705
0582, 0702
0573, 0664
0672
0717, 0790, 1041,
1071, 1072
0730
Dansai
0770
Malata
Daytek
0872
Marantz
McIntosh
Medion
Memorex
Microsoft
Minato
Awa
Decca
0770
Hiteker
Axion
1071, 1072
0655, 0662
1224
Denon
0490, 0634
0778
Humax
1588
B & K
Denver
Desay
iLo
1348
0690, 0695, 0831, 1270
0522, 1708
0752
BBK
1407, 1455
1316
Initial
0717
Bel Canto Design
Blaupunkt
Blue Parade
Blue Sky
Brandt
1571
Diamond Vision
Digitrex
Digix
Innovative Technology 1542
0717
0672
INOi
Integra
IRT
1747
Mintek
0839, 0717
1521, 0521
1130, 1611
1082
0571
1272
0571, 0627
Mitsubishi
MixSonic
Momitsu
Mustek
Myryad
0695, 0699
0651
Disney
0675, 1270
0705
0783
DiViDo
Jaton
JBL
1078
Broksonic
Bush
0695, 1419
0690
Dual
0675, 1068, 1085
1127
0702
0730
Durabrand
DVD2000
Electrohome
Elta
JMB
JSI
0695
0894
California Audio Labs 0490
Cambridge Audio 1471
Cambridge Soundworks 0690
Cary Audio Design 1477
0521
1423
NAD
0591, 0692, 0741
0770
1003
JVC
0558, 0623, 0867,
1164, 1275, 1550, 1602
Naiko
0690
Nakamichi
1222
Emerson
0591, 0675
jWin
1049, 1051, 1469, 1675 NEC
0785, 0869
97
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
DVD
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Nesa
0717
Presidian
Primare
0675, 1072
0886, 1467, 1618
0674
Schwaiger
0752
1158
Tevion
0651
NeuNeo
Next Base
NexxTech
Nintaus
Norcent
0509
Sensory Science
Sharp
Theta Digital
0571
0826
Princeton
Proceed
Proscan
Prosonic
ProVision
Qwestar
Radionette
RadioShack
RCA
0630, 0675, 0752, 1256 Thomson
1117 Tivo
0522, 0511
1588
1402
0672
Sharper Image
Sherwood
1051
0522
0633, 0770, 1043, 1077 Toshiba
0503, 0573, 0539,
0695, 1154, 1588,
1608, 1769
0799, 0800, 0803, 0804
0770
1003, 0872, 1107,
1265, 1457
0503, 0627, 0792
0575, 1224, 1525
0571
0699
Shinsonic
0533, 0839
0674
0778
Sigma Designs
Slim Art
Onkyo
Oppo
0651
0784
Tredex
0741
SM Electronic
Sonic Blue
0690, 0730
0573, 0715, 0783,
0869, 1099
0533, 1533, 0864,
1017, 1033, 1069,
1070, 1431, 1432,
1433, 1548
1074, 1342, 1532
0717, 0860, 1105
0675
Unimax
United
Optimus
0571
0730
OptoMedia Electronics 0896
0522, 0571, 0717,
0790, 0822
0571
Universum
Urban Concepts
US Logic
V
0591
Oritron
0651
Sony
0503, 0539
0839
Palsonic
Panasonic
0672, 0852
Realistic
REALmagic
Reoc
0503, 0490, 0571,
0632, 0703, 1010,
1011, 1762
0674
1064, 1226
0790
0752
Venturer
Vialta
Revoy
0699
Sungale
SVA
1509
Philco
Philips
0690
Rio
0869
Vizio
1064, 1226
1027, 1360
0699
0503, 0539, 0646,
RJTech
0118, 1360
0623, 1178
0823, 1004
0651
Sylvania
Symphonic
TAG McLaren
Tatung
Vocopro
Wesder
Xbox
0675, 1267, 1354, 1846 Rotel
0675, 1334
0894
Phonotrend
PianoDisc
Pioneer
0699
Rowa
0522, 1708
1001
1024
Saba
0770
Xwave
0525, 0571, 0142,
0631, 0632, 1475,
1476, 1571
1020, 1061, 1086,
1245, 1316, 1478
0539
Sampo
Samsung
0698, 0752, 1501
0490, 0573, 0744,
Teac
0571, 0717, 0692,
0790, 0809
0490, 0703
0770
Yamaha
0490, 0539, 0545,
0497, 0817
0872
0199, 0820, 1044, 1075 Technics
Yamakawa
Zenith
Zeus
Polaroid
Sansui
Sanyo
0695
Technika
Technosonic
Techwood
Terapin
0503, 0591, 0741, 0869
0784
0670, 0675, 0695,
0873, 1334
0783
0730
Polk Audio
Portland
0692
Zoece
1265
0770
Schneider
1031
DVD-R
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Accurian
Apex Digital
Aspire Digital
Astar
1416
Funai
Gateway
Go Video
iLo
0675, 1334
LiteOn
1158, 1416, 1440
0646, 0675, 1506
0490, 1010, 1011
0646
Samsung
Sensory Science
Sharp
0490
1056
1073, 1158, 1194
Magnavox
1158
1168
0741, 1158, 1304, 1730 Panasonic
0675
1489
1348
Philips
Pioneer
Polaroid
RCA
Sony
1033, 1069, 1070,
1431, 1432, 1433
0675
Broksonic
Coby
1419
JVC
1164, 1275
1421
0631, 1475, 1476
1086
1086
Kreisen
LG
Sylvania
Zenith
CyberHome
1129, 1502
0741
0522
0741
BD (HD-DVD)
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Pioneer
2052, 0142
Samsung
0199
Toshiba
1769
LD
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Brand
Codes
Aiwa
0203
Marantz
Mitsubishi
NAD
0064, 0194
0059, 0241
0059
Polk Audio
Quasar
0194
Technics
Theta Digital
Toshiba
Victor
0204
0194
0059
0245
0059
0217
Carver
0064, 0194, 0323
0059, 0172, 0241
0023
0204
Denon
Realistic
Renaissance
Samsung
Sega
0203
Disco Vision
Funai
NEC
0286
0323
0203
Optimus
Panasonic
Philips
0059
0323
Wards
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
0194
0204
0023
Yamaha
0023, 0395
0064, 0194
Sharp
0001
Magnavox
0064, 0194, 0217, 0241 Pioneer
0059, 0023, 0241, 1274 Sony
0193, 0201, 0270
98
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
Using the remote control unit to control other
devices
Receiver control buttons
When a Pioneer receiver is connected to the plasma display, the
receiver can be operated using buttons 1 to 3.
1. RECEIVER (STANDBY/ON)
Turns the Pioneer receiver power on and off.
2. RECEIVER INPUT
Selects the input source connected to the Pioneer receiver.
3. RECEIVER VOL +/–
Adjusts the Pioneer receiver volume level. Press VOL + to
increase the volume and VOL – to decrease it.
1
2
3
Mode switch
(buttons operate
at any position)
99
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
CBL/SAT control buttons
When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SAT, the cable converter or
satellite broadcast tuner connected to the plasma display can be
operated using the buttons shown below (3, 4, 5, 8 and 9 for
cable converters and 1 to 7 for satellite tuners):
1. SAT MENU
1
6
Displays the satellite broadcasting menu screen.
2. ENTER, / / /
2
ENTER:
Activates the selected function.
/ / / : Selects items on the SAT GUIDE screen or SAT
7
MENU screen.
3. 0 to 9
Press a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel
that you want to watch.
3
4. CH +/–
Selects a higher or lower channel.
8
5. SOURCE
Turns the equipment power on and off.
9
4
5
6. SAT GUIDE
Displays the satellite broadcasting guide screen.
7. RETURN
When the CBL/SAT menu is displayed, restores the
immediately previous screen.
Mode switch
(with“CBL/SAT”
selected)
8. CH ENTER*
Enters the selected channel with the direct channel
selection buttons.
9. CH RETURN*
Switches between the current channel and the channel you
were watching immediately before.
*
Some cable converter manufacturers do not preset CH
ENTER and CH RETURN.
Note
• CABLE and SAT cannot be selected at the same time.
100
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
VCR control buttons
When the Mode switch is set to VCR, VCRs connected to the
plasma display can be operated with the remote control unit.
• Press the input selector button INPUT 1 to INPUT 7 that
matches the input terminal number to which the VCR is
connected, then the VCR can be operated using 1 to 8.
• VCRs made by other manufacturers can also be operated
using the remote control unit if the remote control signals of
the devices have been preset. See page 92.
1. CH +/–
Selects the channel on the VCR.
2. (PLAY)
Selects playback.
3. (REW)
Rewinds the tape and allows picture search.
4. SOURCE
Turns the power of the VCR on and off.
5. (PAUSE/STILL)
1
2
Pauses playback and displays still pictures.
6. (FF)
3
4
6
7
Rapidly advances the tape and allows picture search.
5
8
7. (REC)
Starts recording.
Mode switch
(with “VCR”
selected)
8. (STOP)
Stops tape transport.
101
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Useful Remote Control Features
14
1. CH +/– (DVD recorder only)
Changes the channel of the tuner built into the DVD
recorder.
2. (PLAY)
Selects playback.
6
7
3. (SCAN)/ (CHAPTER SEARCH)
Continue pressing to go backward.
Pressing quickly once takes you to the start of the chapter
currently playing. Each time you press it, you move back to
the start of the previous chapter.
8
9
4. SOURCE
Turns the equipment power on and off.
10
5. (PAUSE/STILL)
Pauses playback and displays still pictures.
6. DVD MENU
Displays the DVD menu.
7. DVD TOP MENU
1
2
Displays the DVD top menu.
8. ENTER, / / /
3
4
11
12
ENTER:
Activates the selected function.
/ / / : Selects items on the DVD MENU screen.
5
13
9. RETURN
Mode switch
(with “DVD/
DVR” selected)
When the DVD menu is displayed, restores the immediately
previous screen.
10. A (BLUE), B (RED), C (GREEN), D (YELLOW)
(BD only)
Controls the BD-J Application.
DVD/DVR control buttons
When the Mode switch is set to DVD/DVR, DVD players, DVD
recorders or BD players connected to the plasma display can be
operated with the remote control unit.
11. (SCAN)/ (CHAPTER SEARCH)
Continue pressing for fast forward.
Pressing quickly once takes you to the start of the next
chapter. Each time you press it, you move ahead to the start
of the next chapter.
• When the input selector button having the same number as the
input terminal connected to a DVD player, DVD recorder or BD
player is pressed, these players can be operated using
1
to 13.
12. (REC) (DVD recorder only)
• DVD players, DVD recorders, BD players or HD-DVD players
Starts recording.
made by other manufacturers can also be operated using the
remote control unit if the remote control signals of the devices
have been preset. See page 92.
13. (STOP)
Stops playback.
With some DVD players or DVD recorders, press twice to
open the disc tray.
12, 13 STOP REC (DVD recorder only)
Press and hold , and then press to stop recording. This
operation applies to only Pioneer DVD recorders.
Note
• A DVD player, DVD recorder and BD player cannot be selected
at the same time.
• For some LD players, the buttons on the remote control unit
function as above. For the supported LD players, see the LD
brands and codes on page 98.
102
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Chapter 15
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Problem
GENERAL
• No power.
Possible Solution
• Is the power cord disconnected? (See page 24.)
• Has been turned on? (See page 26.)
• Check if you pressed TV on the remote control unit. (See page 26.)
If the indicator on the system lights up red, press TV on the remote control unit or STANDBY/ON on the
plasma display.
• Power is suddenly turned off.
• Is the sleep timer set? (See page 60.)
• Check the power control setting. (See page 59.)
(See page 16.)
• A malfunction may have occurred in the home network module.
• The system cannot be operated.
• External influences such as voltage malfunction, static electricity, etc., may cause improper operation.
In this case, operate the system after first turning off the power of the plasma display, or unplugging the
power cord and re-plugging it in after one to two minutes.
• Remote control unit does not operate.
• Check if TV is off. Turn the button on when the POWER ON and STANDBY indicators are off.
• Is the Mode switch set correctly? Slide it to the TV position. (See page 15.)
• Are batteries inserted with connect polarity (+, –)? (See page 25.)
• Are batteries worn out? (Replace with new batteries.) (See page 25.)
• Operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor on the plasma display.
(See page 25.)
• Are you using it under strong or fluorescent lighting?
• Is a fluorescent light illuminating the remote control sensor?
• POWER ON indicator or STANDBY
indicator is quickly flashing.
• Internal protective circuits may have been activated.
First turn the power off by removing the AC power cord from the power outlet, and then turn the power on
again in after one minute or more. If the problem is not solved with this, contact the nearest Pioneer
Authorized Independent Service Company, or the Customer Support Division (see back cover).
PICTURE/SOUND
• No image and audio is presented.
• Check if the input source for video or PC has been unintentionally selected although you want to watch a TV
channel. (See page 27.)
• Check if you have activated the Parental Control function. (See page 37.)
Enter a password to temporarily cancel the Parental Control function. (See page 41.)
• Check the cable connection with the antenna. (See page 23.)
• Check the cable connection with the other equipment. (See pages 65 to 70.)
• No picture.
• Is connection to other components correct? (See pages 65 to 70.)
• Is a non-compatible PC signal being input? (See page 69.)
• Is picture adjustment correct? (See page 54.)
• Screen appears dark
• Check if any obstacles exist in front of the Room Light Sensor. (See pages 13 and 64.)
• Audio is output but no image is
presented.
• Check if you have selected “Picture Off” for Energy Save. With this option selected, the screen is deactivated;
only audio is output. To restore the screen display, press any button other than VOL +/– and MUTING. (See
page 59.)
• Images are presented but no audio is
output.
• Check if you have selected the minimum volume. (See page 28.)
• Check if you have muted sound. (See page 28.)
• When using a video or PC input source, check that the audio terminals are also connected.
(See pages 65 to 68 and 69.)
• Sound is reversed between the right and • Check if the speaker cable connections have been reversed between the right and left or if the speaker cable
left.
from either speaker has been disconnected. (for PRO-1150HD only), (See page 19.)
• Has the balance been correctly adjusted? (See page 58.)
• Sound is output from only a single
speaker.
• Picture is cut off.
• Is the image position correct? (See page 61.)
• Has the correct screen size been selected? (See page 62.)
• Strange color, light color, dark or color
misalignment.
• Adjust the picture tone. (See page 54.)
• Is the room too bright? The picture may look dark in a room that is too bright.
103
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Problem
Possible Solution
• After-image lag.
• After displaying a still image or a very bright image for a certain period of time, if the screen is then switched
• This can be rectified by playing a rather bright moving image for several minutes. However, displaying a still
image for excessively long periods of time may cause permanent display deterioration.
• You can display the “Video Pattern” screen that helps eliminate after-image when it occurs. (See page 64.)
• Brightness and color tone on both sides • If images in 4:3 mode or letterbox images are displayed for long periods or for shorter periods over several
days, an after-image may remain due to burning. This is a characteristic of plasma displays.
• We recommend that you enjoy watching images in a full screen mode as much as possible. (See page 62.)
• We recommend you select “Auto” for “Brightness Sync.” in the Side Mask setting. This adjusts the
differ from those in the center in 4:3
mode.
HDMI Control
• Check if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the HDMI
Control functions. (See page 89.)
• HDMI Control functions do not operate.
• Check if you have entered the settings properly for “Setting the HDMI Control”. (See page 90.)
• Check if the settings for the HDMI Control functions are effective on the connected device(s). For details, refer to the
operation manual that came with the device.
• Check if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the the HDMI
Control functions. (See page 89.)
• No image and audio is presented.
• No picture
• Check if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the HDMI
Control functions. (See page 89.)
• Check if you have entered the settings properly for “Setting the HDMI Control”. (See page 90.)
• Check if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the HDMI
Control functions. (See page 89.)
• No sound
• Check if you have entered the settings properly for “Setting the HDMI Control”. (See page 90.)
• Check if you have an HDMI controlled AV system connected to one HDMI terminal and the recorder or player
connected to another HDMI terminal on the plasma display. When connected this way, audio out from the recorder/
player does not go through the plasma display SPDIF terminal resulting in no sound to the AV system. When using
an AV system and recorder or player, be sure to connect the recorder or player to the AV system input terminal.
• Check if the connections are properly made between the plasma display and the device that supports the HDMI
Control functions. (See page 89.)
• Check if you have entered the settings properly for “Setting the HDMI Control”. (See page 90.)
• An error message “The device cannot be
operated. Please check the connection.”
appears.
Home Media Gallery/NETWORK
• Confirm that the PC is On and not in Standby or Sleep. (nothing is chosen in “Select Servers”). When the PC has
started with the “Wake On LAN” (WOL), check if the PC complies with WOL or if the WOL setup has been properly
done on the device manager for BIOS or Windows.
• No servers are found
• Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality when cabled
directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and display speed.
• Check the logical connections (IP Address setup, DHCP, etc.). Confirm the IP Address is correct if acquired by Auto
IP and Firewall setup. Also check if the IP Address is properly acquired with DHCP on the “Network Setup” screen
that follows the “Setup” menu.
• Using two or more application servers on a single PC may cause unstable operation.
For proper operation, it is strongly recommended that one application server is used on a single PC.
• Check the PC if its media server is running. Restart if necessary. Check if one or more servers are On (this may cause
malfunction).
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.
• Check the media server setup. If a client is registered manually the setup procedure may have to be run again. An
option “Not Allowed” may have been selected for connections.
• Check if UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) is enabled on your router. If it is not, enable it. Refer to your router’s
instruction manual for procedures.
• Wait for a short period then select “Update to Latest Information” from the Tool Menu. (See page 78)
• Refer to the possible solutions provided for “No servers are found”.
• No previously connected server(s) found
(items in “Select Servers” are dimmed)
• Check if the server is correctly set up for file sharing, if the target folder has been deleted, or if one or more folders
have been corrupted on the server.
• Check if there are too many files in each folder.
• An available server is selected but
cannot be navigated
• This arbitrary selection happens when the server you used before had been set to display the top menu screen (if you
reset it, other servers connected are also reset). When the “Single Server/USB” option is selected on the “Auto
Connection Setup” screen that follows the “Setup” menu, the server is automatically accessed if only one server is
connected. Use the Tool Menu to select the proper server. (See page 78)
• A server is arbitrarily selected
• The Media Navigator displays the server contents as classified by the server.
• If no information (such as ID3 tag) is contained in the file, files cannot be classified on the server.
• File/folder configuration differs from one
server to another (strange configuration)
• Refer to the possible solutions provided for “No servers are found”.
• If the above does not solve the problem, try turning a off on the remote control unit then turn TV a on on the plasma
display.
• “The list could not be acquired.” appears
on the Server List screen
• Refer to the possible solutions provided for “No servers are found”.
• If the above does not solve the problem, try turning a off on the remote control unit then turn TV a on on the plasma
• A communication error message appears
display.
104
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Problem
Possible Solution
Home Media Gallery/PLAYBACK
• Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality when cabled
directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and display speed.
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.
• Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check if the file is damaged.
• When connected by a wireless LAN, check if the bit rate is sufficient.
• Image or sound is interrupted or
distorted (Block noise appears)
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed.
• Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality when cabled
directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and display speed.
• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.
• Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check if the file is damaged.
• Check if the leasing contract for the server has expired.
• Cannot play or display
• When connected by a wireless LAN, check if the bit rate is sufficient.
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed.
• It takes time to capture and display a large-sized image. If this is the case, no operation may be performed.
• See the Pioneer website (www.pioneerelectronics.com) for the formats that are supported.
Home Media Gallery/FIRMWARE
• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power unit,
mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the
device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate
problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into
the multi-card reader.
• No updates are possible on USB
• Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed.
• Check that the firmware file has been correctly downloaded. Also check the file size.
• See the Pioneer website (www.pioneerelectronics.com) for details.
Home Media Gallery/USB
• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power unit,
mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the
device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate
problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into
the multi-card reader.
• USB devices are not properly recognized
• Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed.
• No USB hub is supported. When you connect a home network, connect directly to the device’s USB port.
• Verify that the file complies with the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check the file for damage.
• Some files that comply with the supported format may not play back or display properly.
• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged (power unit,
mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files, and if the speed of the
device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit-rate
problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant, insert the Flash Memory card into
the multi-card reader.
• Image or sound is interrupted or
distorted (Block noise appears)
Home Media Gallery/Slide Show
• Check if the player is placed into the pause or rotation mode. If that is the case, press PLAY or ENTER to start the
slideshow.
• Slideshow (photo content) doesn’t start
• The time needed to display a picture may be longer than the time set to display in Slide Show settings.
Reduce the picture size using a PC and try again.
• Slide Show only displays the supported files. If there is only one supported file, that file will remain on the display and
not display any other files.
• Next picture does not appear in the
slideshow
105
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Problem
Possible Solution
OTHER
• TV-Guide data cannot be obtained.
• If TV-Guide data cannot be obtained with ANT.A selected for cable connection, select ANT.B for over the air.
- Select “Antenna” for “Select service(s)” on Screen 3.
- Select “ANT B IN” on Screen 4.
• An external device connected to the
USB port does not operate.
• Check if the device is connectable to the display. (See page 73.)
• Re-insert the USB cable. (See page 73.)
• For connection, use a USB cable shorter than 5 m. (See page 73.)
• Check if the USB cable is properly connected. (See page 73.)
• First turn the power off and then turn it on again in order to check if the external device works correctly.
• Check if the external device works correctly after the USB device was restarted.
• Check if the digital still camera is in the viewing mode.
• Refer to the instruction manual for the digital still camera.
• Photo data stored in a digital still
camera cannot be read through USB
interface.
• Check if the device is connectable to the display. (See page 73.)
• Check if the digital still camera is turned on.
• Panel sounds / noises
• Panel generated sounds, examples: Fan motor noise, Electrical Circuit Humming / Glass Panel buzzing are
normal operation of a phosphor-based matrix display.
• Screen displays uneven brightness on
the sides.
• Display content that completely fills the screen until unevenness is minimized. Some signals may require to
change the AV mode setting. (See page 62.)
If the following error codes appear on the screen, check the corresponding items in the table.
Code
Message
Check
SD04 and Powering off. Internal temperature too high.
Check if the ambient temperature of the plasma display is high.
SD11
SD05
Check temperature around PDP.
(PRO-1150HD)
Internal protection circuit turns power off.
Is there a short in speaker cable?
(PRO-950HD)
Check the speaker cable connections between the plasma display and the speakers.
Internal protection circuit turns power off.
Contact the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company, or the
Customer Support Division. (See back cover.)
106
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software
Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING ROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
“Portions of this software are copyright (c) <year> The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.” [please replace
<year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use]
If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that “this software is based in part on the work
of the Independent JPEG Group”
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence.
libpng version 1.2.6, September 12, 2004, is Copyright (c) 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and is distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of
satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
107
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the following set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or
implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and
Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from
the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a
component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is
not required but would be appreciated.
A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient use in “about” boxes and the like: printf (“%s”,png_get_copyright (NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files “pngbar.png” and “pngbar.jpg (88x31) and “pngnow.png” (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
September 12, 2004
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The GIFLIB distribution is Copyright (c) 1997 Eric S. Raymond
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
108
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Copyright (C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
“Copyright (c) 1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.”
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
Linux Source Notice
The Pioneer Plasma Television is powered by utilizing the Linux operating system. The machine readable copy of the corresponding
source code is available for the cost of distribution. To obtain a copy, please visit
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/ for more information.
GNU General Public License
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit
to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can
get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these
things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you
have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the
original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program
will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent
must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU General Public License
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be
distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work
based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation
is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
109
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all
the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this
License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program
is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply
to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which
is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program)
on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of
physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete
source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and
so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long
as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from
the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any
further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties to this License.
110
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they
do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under
this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if
a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the
Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to
it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the
author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of
all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE
OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make
it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey
the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
111
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to
redistribute it under certain conditions; type ’show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ’show w’ and ’show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
commands you use may be called something other than ’show w’ and ’show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items-
whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program,
if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ’Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by
James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the
GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
GNU Lesser General Public License
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages-typically libraries-of the Free
Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether
this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure
that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or
can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these
rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide
complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling
it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by
someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s
reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot
effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.
Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified
in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser
General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use
this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a
combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire
combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the
library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General
Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These
disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides
advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it
becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library.
112
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by
limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of
free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole
GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is
linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
“work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter
must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU Lesser General Public License
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or
other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”).
Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on
the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
”Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code
means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a
work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the
Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the
facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its
purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply
to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when
you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a
volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library.
To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License,
version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared,
then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the
Library into a program that is not a library.
113
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore
falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that
is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable
is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be
a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a
work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered
by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include
the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable
linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code,
so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is
understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a
copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and
(2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-
compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in
Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for
reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating
system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable
that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities
not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where
to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
114
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any
further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by
third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they
do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under
this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.
For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or
indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of
the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it
and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version
ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free
status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE
OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
115
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms
of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice
is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) year name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as
published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library,
if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ’Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random
Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
116
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Specifications
Item
50" plasma display model: PRO-1150HD
1365 × 768 pixels
42" plasma display model: PRO-950HD
1024 × 768 pixels
Number of pixels
Audio Amplifier
Speakers
17 W + 17 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 6 Ω)
17 W + 17 W (1 kHz, 10 %, 6 Ω)
Woofer: 6.6 cm x 10.6 cm cone type
Tweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type
Woofer: 4.8 cm x 13 cm cone type
Tweeter: 2.5 cm semidome type
Sound Effect
Power Requirement
Weight
SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass
SRS FOCUS/SRS/SRS TruBass
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 376 W (23 W Standby)
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 320 W (23 W Standby)
Main unit: 34.8 kg (76.7 lbs.)
Main unit: 29.9 kg (65.9 lbs.)
Stand: 1.9 kg (4.2 lbs.) (including bolts)
Total: 31.8 kg (70.1 lbs.)
Stand: 2.5 kg (5.6 lbs.) (including bolts)
Speaker system: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs.) (including
cables, mounting fittings and screws)
Total: 40.8 kg (89.9 lbs.)
Reception System (Digital)
Circuit type
ATSC Digital TV system
8VSB/64QAM/256QAM/QPSK demodulation
VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69
Ch. 2 to 135
Tuner
VHF/UHF
CATV
Audio
Dolby Digital
format
Reception System (Analog)
Circuit type
American TV standard NTSC system
Video signal detection PLL full synchronous detection, PLL digital Synthesizer system
Tuner
VHF/UHF
CATV
VHF Ch. 2 to 13 UHF Ch. 14 to 69
ANT/CABLE A IN Ch. 1 to 135 ANT B IN Ch. 1 to 125
Audio multiplex
Terminals Rear ANT/CABLE A IN
BTSC system
75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for DTV/VHF/UHF/CATV in
ANT B IN
75 Ω UNBAL, F Type for VHF/UHF/CATV in
INPUT 1
S-VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in
INPUT 2
COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in
INPUT 4
HDMI in*, AUDIO in
PC INPUT
INPUT 5
Analog RGB in, AUDIO in
HDMI in*, AUDIO in
INPUT 6
HDMI in*
INPUT 7
HDMI in*
AUDIO OUT
IR REPEATER OUT
DIGITAL OUT
ETHERNET
CONTROL OUT
SPEAKERS
SUB WOOFER
CableCARD
INPUT 3
AUDIO out (Fixed)
1
Optical
1
1
6 Ω to 16 Ω
–
Variable
Point of Deployment
COMPONENT VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in
16 Ω to 32 Ω recommended
USB in**
Side
PHONES
USB
On-screen display languages
English/French/Spanish
*
This conforms to HDMI1.3 and HDCP1.1.
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a digital interface that handles both video and audio using a single cable.
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a technology used to protect copyrighted digital contents that use the Digital
Visual Interface (DVI).
** This conforms to USB 1.1 and 2.0 .
• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
117
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
Dimensions
PRO-1150HD
Unit: mm (inch)
115
(4-1/2)
1426 (56-5/32)
552 (21-23/32)
301
(11-27/32)
PRO-950HD
Unit: mm (inch)
115
(4-1/2)
1040 (40-15/16)
552 (21-23/32)
238
(9-3/8)
Trademarks
• In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of
its affiliates. In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark of Transcontinental, Inc. and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide
International, Inc.
•
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc.
• WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
®
• This product includes FontAvenue fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
• DDC is a registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association.
• CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.
• This software is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group.
• The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions.
• The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
• DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
118
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
15
License
• The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates.
• Content owners use Windows Media digital rights management technology (WMDRM) to protect their intellectual property,
including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to
protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their
content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.
• This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.
• The DLNA logo is permitted to the product that has obtained a DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) certificate.
Patent
• The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following United States patents 4,908,713; 6,498,895; 6,850,693;
6,396,546; 5,940,073; 6,239,794 to Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries.
Disclaimer Notice
• Gemstar-TV Guide International Inc. and/or its related affiliates are not in any way liable for the accuracy or availability of the program
schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system and cannot guarantee service availability in your area. In no
event shall Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates be liable for any damages in connection with the accuracy
or availability of the program schedule information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen system.
• Pioneer provides information to help in setting up a network and connecting the plasma display to the network, but you are solely
responsible for proper network setup and the connection. Pioneer bears no responsibility whatsoever for any damage arising from
the network setup and the connection you made.
• When downloading software updates from the Pioneer website and performing updating procedures (according to the item
“Software Update” on page 85), make sure that your connections from the network to your USB flash drive, and from your USB flash
drive to the plasma display, are uninterrupted.
Pioneer bears no responsibility for any failures or damage resulting from connection problems.
• Content may not work properly depending on the USB device used. Pioneer assumes no responsibility whatsoever for any failures
or damage resulting from the USB device used by the user.
Important Notice about software upgrade from Pioneer
Attention Pioneer PDP Owners:
Thank you for purchasing a Pioneer Digital Cable Ready (DCR) compatible Plasma TV.
You have purchased the most advanced product of its kind available today.
However, as technology advances, DCR systems may continue to evolve. To maintain compatibility with DCR systems and features,
your Plasma TV may benefit from, or require software upgrades.
As part of our commitment to our customers, Pioneer will send you upgrade software and instructions as needed to keep your DCR
compatible Plasma TV up to date with this technology.
Please take the time to register your DCR compatible Plasma TV at
www.pioneerelectronics.com
This registration enables us to keep you up to date on changes that may occur.
Thank you very much.
Note:
DCR function will work only for USA.
DCR function will not work in Canada.
Software update for the Home Media Gallery
You can also update the software for the Home Media Gallery at the Pioneer website above. For details, see page 89.
119
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to
purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below.
8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 6 2 5
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support Division at the above listed number for assistance.
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.
Customer Support Division
P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service
Company in Canada.
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
Customer Satisfaction Department
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service
Autorisé Pioneer le plus près de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.
Service Clientèle
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.
S018_B_EF
Register Your Product on
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<ARB1575-A>
Printed in China
<07C000001>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|